Home

"user manual"

1. 1 Shield 2 CH1 cu V CH1 gts e 1 2 CH1 a V l 500kQ CH2 a V 500kQ CH2 CH2 I i CH2 yo 53 V l 500kQ SLD 2 4 FG Cc sa Insulation ETE ee EIEEE PTEN EEEE Se EE E EA A 1 Shield gt x lt o 2 CH3 BOOKS z V CH3 CH3 a iy CH3 3 V l 500kQ CH4 ie V 500kQ CH4 CH4 l 4 CH4 a 3 V l 500kQ SLD 2 4 FG ic 3 4 For the wire use the shielded twisted pair cable In addition keep a distance of 150mm or more from the main circuit lines or power cables 2 This indicates the input resistance of the A D converter module 3 The grounds of FG between CH1 and CH2 FG between CH3 and CH4 and the internal circuit have been isolated 4 Always connect the shielded wire for each channel to the shield terminal and ground the FG terminal In addition ground the FG terminal of the power supply module 53 2 For the current input Signal source 0 to 20mA 1 Shield 4 2 CH1 500k 4 V Ce CH1 2509 5 CH1 I Vv CH1 m 3 V l 500kQ CH2 3 q V 500kQ CH2 2509 CH2 l ik Li CH d 3 V l 500kQ SLD 2 5 FG r
2. Address Address a decimal hexadecimal Name Default Read Write 1028 4044 to to System area 1031 4074H 1032 4084 CH1 Logging cycle setting value 4 R W 1033 4094 CH2 Logging cycle setting value 4 R W 1034 40A CH3 Logging cycle setting value 4 R W 1035 40By CH4 Logging cycle setting value 4 R W 1036 40Cy to to System area 1039 40Fy 1040 4104H CH1 Logging cycle unit setting 1 R W 1041 4114 CH2 Logging cycle unit setting 1 R W 1042 4124 CH3 Logging cycle unit setting 1 R W 1043 4134 CH4 Logging cycle unit setting 1 R W 1044 4144 to to System area 1047 4174 1048 4184 CH1 Logging points after trigger 5000 R W 1049 4194 CH2 Logging points after trigger 5000 R W 1050 41Auy CH3 Logging points after trigger 5000 R W 1051 41By CH4 Logging points after trigger 5000 R W 1052 41Cy to to System area 1055 41Fy 1056 420 CH1 Hold trigger condition setting 0000 R W 1057 4214 CH2 Hold trigger condition setting 0000H R W 1058 4224 CH3 Hold trigger condition setting 0000 R W 1059 4234 CH4 Hold trigger condition setting 0000 R W 1060 4244 to to System area 1063 4274 1064 4284 CH1 Trigger data 54 R W 1065 4294 CH2 Trigger data 55 R W 1066 42A4 CH3 Trigger data 56 R W 1067 42B4 CH4 Trigger data 57 R W 1068 42C4 to to System area 1071 42Fy 1072 4304 Level data 0 0 R W 1073 4314 Level data 1 0 R W 1074 4324 Level data 2 0 R W 1075 433y Level data 3 0 R W 1076 4344
3. CH1 Logging hold request Un G1008 OFF 0 X ON Outside input trigger Not generated a Generated A Hold trigger is generated The logging is held CH1 Logging data The data stored before the last I Un G5000 to Un G14999 10000 data are discarded i Aaa Si a ae e a CH1 Logging points after trigger Un G1048 f lt i CH1 Number of logging data Un G1106 lt 5000 points RERE gt Controlled by the A D converter module Point When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on during logging the logging stops regardless of the ON OFF status of a hold trigger a request to stop logging All the logging data that have been stored before CHO Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on are cleared Check that CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 is ON 1 and set CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 to OFF 0 When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is set to OFF 0 before the logging stops the logging does not stop uonouny Bui66o07 48 49661 p s no Hul66o7 s 1 g The following delay occurs at a maximum until the A D converter module receives a hold trigger a request to stop logging after CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is set to ON 1 Trigger delay Logging cycle Cycle at which logging is actually performed Response time of an outside trigger 1 Check on logging stop Check that CHO Logging
4. Me 5 ie a E b fl K o ul _ 1 8 1 Number Name Description 1 Module joint levers Levers for connecting modules Indicates the operating status of the A D converter module ON The module is operating normally 2 RUN LED green A e Flashing In the offset gain setting mode OFF The 5V power off or watchdog timer error has occurred Indicates the errors and status of the A D converter module ON An error has occurred except for error code 112 3 ERR LED red Flashing Error code 112 has occurred 1 OFF The module is operating normally Indicates the warning status of the A D converter module ON Warning process alarm or rate alarm is occurring 2 4 ALM LED red f Flashing Input signal error detection is occurring 7 OFF The module is operating normally 5 DIN rail hook A hook used to mount the module to a DIN rail 6 Terminal block A 18 point screw terminal block for connecting input signal lines of external devices 7 Terminal block cover A cover for preventing electric shock while the power is on 8 Serial number display Displays the serial number printed on the rating plate 4 For details refer to Error Code List gt Page 221 Section 11 4 2 For details refer to Alarm Code List _ gt Page 226 Section 11 5 23 Memo 24 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes general specifications performance specifications
5. No LED name Status 1 RUN LED 0000 Indicates the LED off 0001 Indicates the LED on 2 ERR LED Alternating indication between 00004 and 0001 Indicates the LED flashing Because the communication status of the A D converter module is displayed on 3 ALM LED GX Works2 the values 00004 and 0001 are not always displayed evenly 2 Hardware switch information The setting status of the intelligent function module switch setting is displayed For details on the setting status refer to the following e Intelligent function module switch setting gt Page 297 Appendix 7 1 Item Intelligent function module switch RANGE Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 MODE Switch 4 Switch 5 H W Information Monitor Status Module ER EE Model LE0AD4 2GH Produet 1410100000000004 Display Format H W LED Information HZW SW Information Item Value Item Value RUN 0001 ERR 0000 Joyuoyy waysks ay q NPON J H AUOJ A V 94 JO SN eJS y BUIYDeYD 2 4 Stop Monitor 231 APPENDICES Appendix 1 Details of I O Signals The following describes the details of the I O signals for the A D converter module which are assigned to the CPU module The I O numbers X Y described in Appendix 1 are for the case when the start I O number of the A D converter module is set to 0 Appendix 1 1 Input signal 1 Module READY X0 Module READY X0 turns on to indicate the prepara
6. 1 Digital output value Scaling lower limit value 4000 0 f 52 Ao 8000 ts tec ain lee Analog input voltage V 6 0 2 10 Analog input voltage V Digital output value Digital operation value 6 32000 8000 4 24000 5000 2 16000 2000 0 8000 1000 2 0 4000 4 8000 7000 6 16000 10000 8 24000 13000 10 32000 16000 Point When the scaling function is used with the digital clipping function scale conversion is executed on the digital operation values after digital clipping e Processing Each Function gt Page 71 Section 8 2 115 uonouny Buljeos 6 8 116 5 When the following values are set for a channel with a user range setting uni polar current of 2 to 18mA e Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e Scaling upper limit value 16000 e Scaling lower limit value 16000 Scaling function Sets for scaling on A I Scaling enable disable setting O Enable Scaling upper limit value 16000 Scaling lower limit value The following figure and table show the digital output values and digital operation values igital output value D Scating upper limit value 16000 32000 Digital output value 2 16000 IN tao Digital operation value Analog input current mA 0 2 18 Analog input current mA Digital output value Digit
7. 147 8 13 2 Stopping the logging operation Logging operation stops when the preset trigger condition is satisfied and the set points of the data are collected The trigger which stops logging when the trigger condition is satisfied is called hold trigger a request to stop logging The method of causing a hold trigger a request to stop logging can be chosen from the following Combination is not available e Logging hold request gt Page 152 Section 8 13 3 e Level trigger L gt Page 154 Section 8 13 4 e Logging outside trigger gt Page 157 Section 8 13 5 Logging data are stored in buffer memory areas m Logging hold request ela ial all Generating a hold trigger from a program at certain timings v Hold trigger 1st data z a request to stop logging 2nd data 7 Level trigger 3rd data z Monitoring a stored value of a certain device and generating 4th data i Logging points after trigger a hold trigger if the value satisfies the preset condition as x i S shown below 5th data Logging is stopped when the set A request to stop logging is processed if the stored value reaches the setting value 6th data lt q points of data are collected after z the hold trigger is generated 9999th data 10000th data Stored value of a device to be monitored A A trigger is A trigger is generated generated Tigger Lanaren Fo fow dem nie mee oe Ne Nowe en sett
8. Device Description W1000 A D conversion completed flag W1001 CH1 Digital output value Ww1002 CH2 Digital output value W1004 CH4 Digital output value W1008 Input signal error detection flag W1010 Latest error code W1018 Warning output flag Process alarm W1019 Warning output flag Rate alarm W1028 CH3 Digital operation value MO CH1 A D conversion completed flag M1 CH2 A D conversion completed flag M2 CH3 A D conversion completed flag M3 CH4 A D conversion completed flag M20 to M27 Warning output flag Process alarm M30 to M37 Warning output flag Rate alarm M50 to M53 Input signal error detection flag X20 Digital output value read command input signal x23 Inputsignal error detection reset signal aX10 X20 to X2F X24 Error reset signal Y30 to Y3F Error code notation BCD 4 digits QY10 Y30 to Y3F SB49 Data link status own station SWBO0 0 Data link status each station station No 1 NO Nesting station No 1 M100 Flag for meeting the communication condition station No 1 SINPO W peeH e 0 pa oauUOD s Npow JelWaAUOD q Y Ue UU TOL 209 5 Setting on the master station 1 Create a project on GX Works2 Select QCPU Q mode for PLC Series and select Q10UDH for PLC Type XX Project gt New New Project Project Type Pea Simple Project i O coel QCPU Q mode Language 2 Display the network parameter setting window and configure the setting as follows XW Project win
9. Target of logging Setting value Digital output value 0 Digital operation value 1 a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Digital operation value 1 All channels Point A channel where a value other than the above values is set brings about an error Error code 2030 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on Logging cannot be performed When CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Disable 1 the setting for CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1027 is ignored 266 APPENDICES 44 CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 Set the cycle of storing the logging data for each channel Set a value for one cycle in CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 e Set a unit of cycle in CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function lt gt Page 130 Section 8 13 a Setting range The available setting range of CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 depends on the setting for CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 Logging cycle Setting value of CHO Logging cycle Setting range of CHO Logging cycle unit un
10. Even if CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is turned from ON 1 to OFF 0 and the logging restarts the logged data is not cleared to 0 278 APPENDICES Appendix 3 1 0 Conversion Characteristic of A D Conversion I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion means the slope of the line connected between the offset value and gain value of when the analog signal voltage or current input from outside of the programmable controller is converted to the digital value 1 Offset value The analog input value voltage or current corresponding to the digital output value 0 A 2 Gain value The analog input value voltage or current corresponding to the digital output value 32000 UOISJ9AUOD C V JO ONSIe OeJeUD UOISJEAUOD O xIPUeddy 279 3 Voltage input characteristic The following graph shows the voltage input characteristic Digital output value 0 8 32767 Practical analog input range 32000 32000 32768 z 15 10 5 0 1 5 10 15 Analog input voltage V Practical analog input range 32767 32000 5 Digital output value 0 8000 8768 Orpen 32000 3208 10 5 01 5 10 15 Analog input voltage V Digital output Maximum No Input range setting Offset value Gain value j value 2 resolution 1 1 to 5V 1V 5V 125uV 0 to 32000 2 0 to 5V OV 5V 156uV 3 10 to 1
11. If the data refresh and the data being checked do not synchronize due to the relationship between the logging cycle and the scan time of the CPU module adjust the logging cycle To check the data without paying attention to logging cycle use Logging hold request gt Page 148 Section 8 13 2 136 8 13 1 Logging load detection function CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS With the logging load detection function more than 10000 points of data can be stored by transferring the device data stored in the buffer memory of the A D converter module to the file registers of the CPU module without stopping logging The takt time of a test which requires high speed conversion can be shortened The data transferred to the file registers of the CPU module can be saved using the latch function MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 1 Overview of the logging load detection function After logging starts an interrupt request is sent to the CPU module and an interrupt program is executed every time the preset number of data to be read is logged The A D converter module has four points of the interrupt cause SI corresponding to the logging load detection of each channel For the setting of interrupt pointers refer to the following e Setting of interrupt pointers gt Page 143 Section 8 13 1 6 b Ex When 1000 points of the latest logging data are transferred to the device memory of the CPU mod
12. 196 2 Clearing errors An error can be cleared by eliminating the cause of the error and turning on then off Error clear request YF from DEV MON TEST Ex When an error occurs in the A D converter module with a start I O number of 10 CPU MON TES window 1 Usethe A and w buttons to select DEV MON TEST and confirm with the button X a gt CPUE 4 T2Ah MENU gt CPU MON TES Device monitor window 2 Set the device to Y and press the button 4 Device test window 3 Usethe A and W buttons to set the device to Y1F and confirm with the button 4 4 Usethe A and buttons to switch on and off Press the button to set the value set in the device test setting CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING This chapter describes the procedure for programming and the basic program of the A D converter module 10 1 Procedure for Programming Create a program to execute A D conversion according to the following procedure Start NO Use the configuration function Switch setting Page 198 Section 10 2 Switch setting parameter setting and auto refresh setting lt _ Page 198 Section 10 2 Do the setting by using a program Page 198 Section 10 2 Initial setting A D conversion enable disable setting program Averaging process setting program Scaling function program 1 Shift function program 1 Digital clipping function pro
13. 24 P a 1st data the oldest 1st data i s 2nd data ore 2nd data 3rd data CHO Latest pointer 3rd data Ga 4th data 2A 4th data i OHE Latest pointer j 5th data the latest seen cence cence i 5th data the latest O iy E 6th data po ad 6th data the oldest 5 CHO Head pointer i i 9999th data M a 9999th data r 10000th data fs 10000th data 1 E L A CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 does not change until all the addresses of the logging data storage area are used after logging starts The value is fixed to 0 When all the addresses are filled the next data is stored in the first address of the logging data storage area When the existing data is overwritten the value of CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 increases by one 7 Number of logging data The number of valid logging data in the logging data storage area can be checked with CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 When 10000 points or less data are collected When data more than 10000 points are collected L L A A 1st data Valid data ist data i 2nd data A N 2nd data l 3rd data r 3rd data Valid data z i i 1 a aa i Nl aa alae sot Ath data CHO Number of logging data 5 Ath data f si 5th data ETE AE TET EAT 5th data CHO Number of logging data 10000 4 6th data
14. CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 X 9950 X10001 0 X 210 X 510 X 2000 X 2100 X 3250 X 50 X 100 X CHO Difference conversion status flag Not converted 0 Converting difference 1 Un G190 to Un G193 Maximum value minimum value after starting difference conversion cCHOM xim m valus SEE E E SS ee HS 1 Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 Un G36 CHO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 2100 2100 X 50 X 50 X Une3s UMG ee a ee ee ee J Maximum value minimum value reset request YD Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD OFF d Operation of when the averaging processing is set If the difference conversion starts after the averaging processing is set the digital operation value at the completion of the averaging processing is determined as the difference conversion reference value In addition CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 changes to Converting difference 1 Point The difference conversion function can be started at any timing UONOUNY UOISIBAUOD SOUsJOIG ZL When the difference conversion function is used with the digital clipping function scaling function and shift function each digital operation value is determined as a difference conversion reference value ifa value other than No request 0 or Trigger request 1 is set in CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 during the difference conv
15. 4 AutoRetreshiet tush EAA yd es SoM Ode a fe ee E E SE 61 75 Offset gain Setting rritin a lee ed Be ba BSA Wh eee eh ae OR 62 7 5 1 Setting from Offset Gain Setting of GX Works2 0 0 cc cece eee ee 62 7 5 2 Setting from a program 0 cece nent nnn es 65 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 69 Si Modes seas tens ncos Ear e vin toed hgh Rae Bane Abed Ngee BE Be ean May PEAY eS 69 8 2 Processing Each Function 0 00 pre a eee eect een n en eae 71 8 3 A D Conversion Enable Disable Function 00 00 c eee teeta 73 8 4 A D Conversion Method 0 0 0 cece teen e tee t eet eee 74 8 5 Input Range Extended Mode Function 0 0 00 000 ccc ence n enna 94 8 6 Maximum Value Minimum Value Hold Function 00000 eects 95 8 7 Input Signal Error Detection Function 0 0 00000 c cet 96 8 8 Warning Output Function 0 000 ence ence ene nes 102 8 8 1 Process alarm ss oxi uen oh Mae heed har eR AMA GR he ead oe RS 102 8 8 2 Ratevalarmx sy poei4 nea ori e beet do baie he bee ee eben Ae 105 8 9 Scaling Function ee di eee da Weslo hee el Ad A oh i E T RELEY 110 8 10 SSH RUIN CHO MN sees as ois acti ck nthe han late aaa Aia sacra derek cede da esd eed Sabena et 117 8 11 Digital Clipping Function 1 0 0 0 0 ccc een ene ne nen a ATA 122 8 12 Difference Conversion Function 0 00 c easar aaeeea 126 8313 Kogging FUNCION sis icacions eon Alig dail giid at a a tan ena E dosed o a ed el iar
16. Controlled by the A D converter module Controlled by the program ON Trigger conversion request OFF i OFF i i 1 1 1 1 1 1 i v 1 N 0 KC wo conversion value XK wo conversion value i ON Digital operation value i Conversion ON Trigger conversion completed 1 al A a Pad completed flag Un G162 Waiting for OFF r OFF i the completion 0 ON ON Trigger conversion completed Clear request 1 k q i y OFF OFF fe clear request Un G163 No request 0 a Default value The default value is No request 0 Point When the setting in Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 is Waiting for the completion 0 the setting does not change even if Trigger conversion completed clear request Un G163 is turned from No request 0 to Clear request 1 The setting in Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 is Conversion completed 1 unless Trigger conversion completed clear request Un G163 is turned from No request 0 to Clear request 1 When trigger conversion request is input without changing the setting A D conversion is performed and the digital output value and digital operation value are updated When a value out of the above range is set an error occurs Error code 2202 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on Trigger conversion completed fl
17. Set whether the warning output of process alarm and rate alarm is enabled or disabled for each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO o o o o enafenajenelcni o o 0 o fenfenajenzfen O i a eae Data for b12 tob15 Rate alarm setting Data for b4 to b7 Process alarm setting are fixed to 0 0 Enable are fixed to 0 0 Enable 1 Disable 1 Disable a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Disable 1 All channels 15 Input signal error detection flag Un G49 Input signal status can be checked with this flag for each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b b4 b3 b2 b1 bO olofo o o o o o o o o o enenslenefen Oe es Data for b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Normal 1 Input signal error a Input signal error detection flag Un G49 status e When an analog input value out of the setting range for CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G145 is detected Input signal error detection flag Un G49 corresponding to each channel is turned to Input signal error 1 e Even an single error detected in any A D conversion enable or input signal error detection enable channels cause Input signal error detection signal XC to turn on b Clearing Input signal error detection flag Un G49 Input signal error detection flag Un G49 can be cleared in the fol
18. Trigger conversion status Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 Waiting for the completion 0 Conversion completed 1 a Trigger conversion completed e With External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal or Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory set in Drive Mode Setting the A D conversion by trigger conversion request is turned to Conversion completed 1 when the conversion of all the channels where the A D conversion is enabled are completed e When Trigger conversion completed clear request Un G163 is turned from No request 0 to Clear request 1 with Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 being Conversion completed 1 the setting in Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 is turned to Waiting for the completion 0 b Clearing Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to clear Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 sessalppy Aiowe Jeyng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 257 30 Trigger conversion completed clear request Un G163 Set this area to change the setting in Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 from Conversion completed 1 to Waiting for the completion 0 For details on the trigger conversion function refer to the following e Trigger Conversion Function gt Page 162 Section 8 14 Internal trigger conversion request Setting value No request 0 Clear request 1
19. request after Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 is turned from Conversion completed 1 to Waiting for the completion 0 7 Response time The following tables list the response time of when Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 is turned from Waiting for the completion 0 to Conversion completed 1 with External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal or Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory set in A D Conversion Timing in Switch Setting a For External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal A D conversion enable disable setting for CH1 and CH3 A D conversion enable disable setting for CH2 and CH4 Response time Conversion enabled for CH1 or CH3 or both Conversion disabled for both channels 140us channels i Conversion enabled for CH2 or CH4 or both Conversion disabled for both channels 140s channels Conversion enabled for CH1 or CH3 or both Conversion enabled for CH2 or CH4 or both 180us u channels channels b For Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 A D conversion enable disable setting for CH1 and CH3 A D conversion enable disable setting for CH2 and CH4 Response time Conversion enabled for CH1 or CH3 or both channels Conversion disabled for both channels Conversion disabled for both channels Conversion enabled for CH2 or CH4 or both channels Conversion enabled for CH1 or CH3
20. Error code 810 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on The operation is performed with the setting before the error Disconnection Detection 4 is valid only when the input range is set as 4 to 20mA extended mode or 1 to 5V extended mode When the channel with the other range is set to Disconnection Detection 4 an error occurs Error code 82D is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on 11 Digital clipping enable disable setting Un G29 Set whether the digital clipping function is enabled or disabled for each channel For details on the digital clipping function refer to the following e Digital Clipping Function gt Page 122 Section 8 11 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 folo o o o o LoLo ToLo To To Jondoserdont S ae PN 0 Enabled Data for b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 1 Disabled a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Disabled 1 All channels 246 APPENDICES 12 CHO Maximum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 Un G36 CHO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 Un G35 Un G37 The maximum and minimum values of a digital operation value converted for each channel are stored in 16 bit signed binary In the following cases CHO Maximum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 Un G36 and C
21. MOV G56 D13 M3 U3 LA ___________________ mov GNA D14 Process alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence U3 sR ov G50 K2M20 Reads A D conversion completed flag Reads CH1 Digital output value J Reads CH2 Digital output value J Reads CH3 Digital operation value J Reads CH4 Digital output value Reads the warning output flag Process alarm M23 Processing when a warning occurs Processing when a warning occurs for CH2 Process alarm upper limit value Rate alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence Processing when a warning occurs Processing when a warning occurs for CH2 Process alarm lower limit value Read Warning output flag Rate alarm Processing when a warning occurs for CH4 Rate alarm upper limit value Input signal error defection status and processing at error detection X30 U3 Mov G51 K2M30 M36 Processing when a warning occurs M37 Processing when a warning occurs Processing when a warning occurs for CH4 Rate alarm lower limit value J Reads Input signal error detection flag Processing when CH1 Input signal X30 U3 MOV G49 K1M50 M50 Processing when an input signal error is detected X43 X3C SET Y3F Error code display and reset processing X3F U3 BCD G19 K4Y50 X44 tN SET Y3F Y3F X3C X3F t _44 dW II _AN IRST YGF
22. Setting range of CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1040 to Un G1043 Un G1032 to Un G1035 us 0 40 to 32767 ms 1 1 to 32767 s 2 1 to 3600 The logging cycle must be an integral multiple of the conversion cycle When the set logging cycle is not an integral multiple of the conversion cycle the logging function operates in a maximum cycle which is an integral multiple within the setting range For the conversion cycle refer to the following e Conversion cycle lt gt Page 75 Section 8 4 1 c Ex Under the following setting the conversion cycle is 80us and the actual logging cycle is 6960us an integral multiple of 80us e A D conversion enabled channels CH1 to CH3 Averaging process setting Sampling processing e CH1 Logging cycle setting value 7000 e CH1 Logging cycle unit setting uS 960 is stored to CH1 Logging cycle monitor value Un G1124 The logging function becomes disabled in the following conditions The logging function is disabled when even one of the following errors occurs after the logging function is enabled and Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off Error code 200 Setting error of CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Un G1 to Un G4 Error code 300 Setting error of CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Un G1 to Un G4 Error code 310 Setting error of CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Av
23. System S 28 CH3 User range setting offset value L System 29 CH3 User range setting offset value H System 293 YOLSDO d D v s xIpueddy uononsjsu pa eoipaq G xipueddy Device Item Setting data Seung Set by range S 30 CH3 User range setting gain value L System S 31 CH3 User range setting gain value H System 32 CH4 User range setting offset value L System 33 CH4 User range setting offset value H System 8 34 CH4 User range setting gain value L System 35 CH4 User range setting gain value H System 3 Functions The offset gain setting value in the user range setting stored in the CPU module is restored to the A D converter module e The interlock signal of the G P OGSTOR instruction includes a completion device and a completion status indication device 1 e The reference accuracy after the restoration of the offset gain setting value decreases approximately three times or less compared to that before the restoration a Completion device The device turns on at the END processing for the scan where the G P OGSTOR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Completion status indication device This device turns on then off depending on the status of the G P OGSTOR instruction completion e Normal completion The device is kept to be off e Error completion The device turns on at the END
24. gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program Input signal error detection flag UniG49 0 gt lt Cinput signal error DYL 0 oe ON ti 7 Input signal error detection OFF Wy OFF signal XC v ON 14 TA OFF i q OFF Error clear request YF a When Input signal error detection signal XC turns on e During conversion or unused 0 is stored in A D conversion completed flag Un G10 for the corresponding channels The channel where the error was detected holds the preceding digital output value just before the error detection in the buffer memory The ALM LED flashes b When Input signal error detection signal XC turns off The ALM LED turns off e Latest error code Un G19 is cleared Point When the analog input value falls within the range set A D conversion resumes even though Input signal error detection signal XC is reset When the first A D conversion after the resumption is completed A D conversion completed flag Un G10 turns to Conversion completed 1 The ALM LED remains flashing Averaging processing starts over after the A D conversion resumes APPENDICES 7 Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD turns on after the maximum and minimum values stored in CHO Maximum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 Un G36 and CHO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 U
25. 205001 aa Level trigger Above 1 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O e Level trigger Below 2 e Level trigger Pass through 3 e Outside trigger 4 CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 is set to a value fu p Set a value within the range of 0 to 4999 in CHO 2060 1 outside the range of 0 to 4999 i ae Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is set toa F A Set OFF 0 or ON 1 in CHO Logging hold request 207011 value other than 0 and 1 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Un G1008 to Un G1011 223 Error code decimal Description and cause of error Action ecima When Outside trigger conversion request or Inside s f trigger conversion request Buffer memory is set to When Outside trigger conversion request or Inside trigger ste f f 2 Conversion timing on Switch 4 on the intelligent conversion request Buffer memory is set to Conversion timing 4 f f function module switch setting set the setting as on Switch 4 on the intelligent function module switch setting the 2200 ARA otit l follows following invalid functions are set to valid e Set b8 to b11 in Warning output setting Un G48 e Rate alarm function to Disable 1 e Logging function e Set all CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to
26. 39 sesseaippy Ajoweyy yng Jo sI S E Address Address 4 4 2 5 Name Default Read Write decimal hexadecimal 1125 4654 s 0 R 1126 4664 CH2 Logging cycle monitor value ms 0 R 1127 4674 us 0 R 1128 4684 s 0 R 1129 4694 CH3 Logging cycle monitor value ms 0 R 1130 46Ay us 0 R 1131 46By s 0 R 1132 46Cy CH4 Logging cycle monitor value ms 0 R 1133 46Dy us 0 R 1134 46E to to System area 1153 4814 First two Last two 1154 4824 digits of the digits of the 0 R year year 1155 4834 CH1 Trigger Month Day 0 detection time 1156 4844 Hour Minute 0 Day of th 1157 4854 Second P AIR 0 R week First two Last two 1158 4864 digits of the digits of the 0 R year year 1159 4874 CH2 Trigger Month Day 0 detection time 1160 4884 Hour Minute 0 Day of the 1161 4894 Second 4 0 R week First two Last two 1162 48A digits of the digits of the 0 R year year 1163 48By CH3 Trigger Month Day 0 detection time 1164 48Cy Hour Minute 0 Day of the 1165 48D Second 4 0 R week First two Last two 1166 48E digits of the digits of the 0 R year year 1167 48Fy CH4 Trigger Month Day 0 detection time 1168 4904 Hour Minute 0 Day of the 1169 4914 Second 0 R week 1170 4924 to to System area 1199 4AFy 1200 4B0y CH1 Loading interrupt enable disable setting 1 R W 1201 4
27. 4 5 6 T For details on the I O conversion characteristic refer to the following I O Conversion Characteristic of A D Conversion gt Page 279 Appendix 3 Maximum resolution in the user range setting Except when receiving noise influence Accuracy under the ambient temperature when the offset gain setting is performed Accuracy when the temperature changes 1 C Ex Accuracy when the temperature changes from 25 C to 30 C 0 05 0 00401 C temperature coefficient x 5 C temperature change 0 070 A momentary input current value which does not cause damage to internal resistors of the module The maximum input current value for constant application is 24mA If the number of offset gain settings exceeds 100000 times an error occurs The error code 170 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on 27 suoleoiioads soUBWUOLIOd ZE 3 2 1 Number of parameter settings Set the initial settings of the A D converter module and the parameter settings of the auto refresh setting so that the number of parameters including those of other intelligent function modules does not exceed the number of parameters that can be set in a CPU module For the maximum number of parameters that can be set in a CPU module maximum number of parameter settings 28 refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection MELS
28. 5 16000 7000 0 0 10000 16000 13000 10 32000 16000 uonouny Buljeos 6 8 113 3 When the following values are set for a channel with an input range of 1 to 5V Extended mode e Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e Scaling upper limit value 16000 e Scaling lower limit value 4000 Scaling enable disable setting O Enable Scaling upper limit value 16000 Scaling lower limit value a000 The following figure and table show the digital output values and digital operation values Digital output value Scaling upper limit value 89000 aeai 16000 Analog input voltage V Scaling lower limit value 0 4000 0 Analog input voltage V Digital output value Digital operation value 0 8000 1000 1 0 4000 2 8000 7000 3 16000 10000 4 24000 13000 5 32000 16000 5 5 32767 16287 114 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 4 When the following values are set for a channel with a user range setting bi polar voltage of 2 to 10V e Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e Scaling upper limit value 16000 Scaling lower limit value 4000 Scaling enable disable setting O Enable Scaling upper limit value 16000 Scaling lower limit value LE titel The following figure and table show the digital output values and digital operation values Digital output value Seating upper limit value 16000 gt 32000 Digital operation value ONN 16000
29. Attenuation band edge lt 6000 e 0 lt Pass band edge frequency Low 80us Attenuation band width e 170 lt attenuation band width e Pass band edge frequency Low lt Pass band edge frequency High CHO Attenuation band width Un G332 to Un G335 This setting is common to both lower and higher sides Set an attenuation band width for each channel e The difference between a BPF pass band edge frequency Low and the attenuation band width is the boundary between the lower attenuation band and a stop band The frequency lower than the difference between the BPF pass band edge frequency Low and attenuation band width is attenuated The sum of the BPF pass band edge frequency High and attenuation band width is the boundary between the higher attenuation band and stop band The frequency higher than the sum of the BPF pass band edge frequency High and attenuation band width is attenuated 83 poya UOISIAAUOD A V 8 84 c Attenuation characteristic and response time The AD converter module uses FIR filters as the digital filters A FIR filter has linear phase response provides system stability and displays a steep attenuation characteristic but takes time to respond Attenuation characteristic The digital filters of the A D converter module set the boundary frequency between a pass band and an attenuation band Also the filters set the boundary frequency between the attenuation band
30. By turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 the A D converter module becomes the following condition and trigger conversion input gets ready to be accepted Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 turns to Waiting for the completion 0 A D conversion completed flag XE turns off e A D conversion completed flag Un G10 turns to During conversion or unused 0 The following describes the operation between External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal or Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 is turned from No request 0 to Conversion request 1 and A D conversion is completed a When using External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal When External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal is turned from No external trigger request OFF to External trigger request ON the A D converter module processes A D conversion When the A D conversion is completed Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 is turned from Waiting for the completion 0 to Conversion completed 1 External trigger External tigger ss Controlled by convert re ae cipal lies the A D converter module q No external trigger OFF Se request OFF lt 5 PN Waiting for A D Waiting for A D conversion trigger input conversion trigger input Digital operation value 0 A D conversion value ON 7 r Conversion A Trigger conversion completed
31. CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 217 11 1 Checking on the Module Detailed Information 6 000 c cece eee ee 218 11 2 Checking by Latest Error Code UN G19 2 teens 219 11 3 Checking on the Module Error Collection Function sssaaa cece eee eee eee 220 TA Eror Code Lister aastas gaani adaa aa Aa ea e ded Ree eae ond 221 115 Alam CodeLbistineeccsti Bete a aS Dudes a Lakers 226 11 6 Troubleshooting 22c02c0 subnets seule eee ha a tle ee eens 227 11 7 Checking the Status of the A D Converter Module by the System Monitor 231 APPENDICES 232 Appendix 1 Details of I O Signals 00 annuun nanen 232 Appendix 1 1 gInputsiQnaligiiccc e cache aittde gadis wih tw Back ae ae ai Ik Ri wg he ae 232 Appendix 1 2 Output signal 0000s 238 Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses 00 0 0 cece ararauna teens 240 Appendix 3 I O Conversion Characteristic of A D Conversion n asses asenaan cee ee eaee 279 Appendix 4 A D Conversion Accuracy 1 2 0 00 0c cc ct e teens 284 Appendix 5 Dedicated Instruction nsaan seann 285 Appendix 5 1 Instruction list 2 ee ee eens 285 Appendix 5 2 G P OFFGAN Gti 6 4 020 fun Oye Sy ho be Sed Be Bnet 286 Appendix5 3 G P OGLOAD d ri mdi aaa eid csi etd sl aol a a Wate seks 288 Appendix 5 4 G P OGSTOR 3 si citicbiactitoniad Roce tobe oso east 292 Appendix 6 Checking Serial Number and Function Version 0 000 0c e eee eee ees
32. H System 28 CH3 User range setting offset value L System 29 CH3 User range setting offset value H System 30 CH3 User range setting gain value L System 289 qgvo190 d 9 g xipueddy uoHonsjsu pajeoipaq G xipueddy f Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range 31 CH3 User range setting gain value H System 32 CH4 User range setting offset value L System 33 CH4 User range setting offset value H System 34 CH4 User range setting gain value L System 35 CH4 User range setting gain value H System a Configure the setting of Pass data classification settingS 2 only When the data is written to the area to be set by system offset gain setting values are not correctly read out 3 Functions e This instruction reads out the offset gain setting value in the user range setting of the A D converter module to the CPU module e The interlock signal of the G P OGLOAD instruction includes a completion device and a completion status indication device 1 a Completion device The device turns on at the END processing for the scan where the G P OGLOAD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Completion status indication device This device turns on then off depending on the status of the G P OGLOAD instruction completion e Normal completion The device is kept to be o
33. In the case that CHO Hold trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 is set to Logging hold request 0 when CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 changes from OFF 0 to ON 1 the logging hold processing starts e In the case that CHO Hold trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 is set to either of Level trigger condition above 1 Level trigger condition below 2 or Level trigger condition pass through 3 when the trigger condition is satisfied after CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 changes from OFF 0 to ON 1 the logging hold processing starts When the level trigger is enabled use Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 as an interlock to operate the level trigger In the case that CHO Hold trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 is set to Outside trigger 4 when an external trigger is detected after CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 changes from OFF 0 to ON 1 the logging hold processing starts When the outside trigger is enabled use Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 as an interlock to operate the outside trigger If CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is turned from ON 1 to OFF 0 during logging hold processing the hold status stop is cleared and the logging restarts e The hold status stop of logging can be checked with CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 b Default value The default value is OFF 0
34. Input signal error detection lower limit value Error detection 100 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 Setting procedure 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable XW Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name lt gt Parameter Item CH1 Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion Po enable disable setting O Enable hd Averaging process setting O Enable Time Average Count 2 Seta detection method in Input signal error detection setting Jnput signal error dtc set 1 Upper and Lower O Disable Input signal error detection setting value 1 Upper and Lower Detection Scaling function Scaling enable disable setting 3 Upper Detection nection Detection 3 Seta value in Input signal error detection setting value Input signal error dtc set 1 Upper and Lower Input signal error detection setting Pe value 10 0 Item Setting range Input signal error detection setting value 0 to 25 0 Point When 4 Disconnection Detection is set to a channel whose input range is not 4 to 20mA Extended mode or 1 to 5V Extended mode an error occurs Error code 820 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on 101 uonouny uol09e 8q 10113 euBis ndu 7 8 8 8 Warning Output Function This section describes process alarms and rate alarms used as the warning output funct
35. Input signal setting value window Scaling setting window Scaling upper limit value window Scaling lower limit value window Shifting amount to conversion value window Digital clipping enable disable setting window uonisues nus Z 6 185 9 3 List of Setting Value Change Windows The following table lists the setting value change windows 1 Displayed in English Name Window Input limits Setting item Window display format Upper limit Lower limit A D conversion enable disable setting A D CONVERSION Selection Average processing setting AVE PROCESSING Selection Time Average Count Average Moving Average Tine Constant TIME COUNT MOV Numeric 65000 0 LPF Pass band end frequency LPF PASS BAND Numeric 32767 0 HPF Pass band end frequency HPF PASS BAND Numeric 32767 0 BPF Pass band end frequency Low BPF PASS BAND L Numeric 32767 0 BPF Pass band end frequency High BPF PASS BAND H Numeric 32767 0 Attenuate band ATTENUATE BAND Numeric 32767 0 Warning output function Process Alarm PROCESS ALARM Selection Process alarm upper upper limit value PRALARM UPR UPR Numeric 32767 32768 Process alarm upper lower limit value PRALARM UPR LWR Numeric 32767 32768 Process alarm lower upper limit value PRALARM LWR UPR Numeric 32767 32768 Process alarm lower lower limit value PRALARM LWR LWR Numeric 32767 32768 Warning output fu
36. Time Average Count 2 Set Digital clipping function enable disable setting to 0 Enable Digital clipping function Set digital clipping function whei Digital clipping function enable disable setting Shift function O Enable Shifting amount to conversion 1 Disable 0 Enable 122 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Setting example of when both the digital clipping function and scaling function are used When the following values are used for the A D converter module with an input range of 0 to 5V e Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e Scaling upper limit value 32000 e Scaling lower limit value 0 e Digital clipping function enable disable setting 0 Enable 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable XZ Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt gt module name gt Parameter Item CH1 Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion enable disable setting OiEnable Averaging process setting O Enable Time Average Count 2 Set Scaling enable disable setting to 0 Enable Scaling enable disable O Enable z Scaling upper limit value 0 Enable Scaling lower limit value 1 Disable 3 Set values for Scaling upper limit value and Scaling lower limit value Scaling enable disable setting O Enable Scaling upper limit value 32000 Scaling lower limit value O tnrreinee 4 Set Digital clipping function enable disable setting to 0 Enabl
37. Wednesday 034 Thursday 044 Friday 054 Saturday 064 Sunday 004 Monday 014 Tuesday 024 Point The trigger detection time is obtained from the clock data of the CPU module Therefore when a hold trigger a request to stop logging is caused right after the programmable controller is powered on the A D converter module may not obtain the clock data from the CPU module If the module could not obtain the time the trigger detection time is recorded as 0 0 0 on January 1st 2000 151 uonouny Bui6607 48 uonesado Bulbb6o y Buiddoys z 1 9 8 13 3 Logging hold request A hold trigger a request to stop logging is generated from a program at any timing Logging starts when CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is set to ON 1 and stops after a preset number of the data is logged CH1 Logging hold request OFF 0 ON 1 Un G1008 A Hold trigger is k gest The logging is held CH1 Logging data The data stored before the last Un G5000 to Un G14999 10000 data are discarded i i gt CH1 Logging points after trigger Un G1048 4 gt CH1 Number of logging data Un G1106 lt 10000 points Sia gt Controlled by the A D converter module Point When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on during logging the logging stops regardless of the ON OFF status of a hold trigger a request to stop logging All the logging data
38. completed flag Un G10 and A D conversion completed flag XE turn off When the analog input value returns within the setting range A D conversion resumes regardless of the reset on Input signal error detection flag Un G49 and Input signal error detection signal XC A D conversion completed flag Un G10 of this channel turns on again after the first refresh ALM LED remains flashing Detection cycle This function works on the sampling cycle CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 5 Clearing input signal errors After the analog input value returns within the setting range turn on then off Error clear request YF The A D converter module arranges the following status when an input signal error is cleared e Clears Input signal error detection flag Un G49 e Turns off Input signal error detection signal XC e Turns off the ALM LED e Clears alarm code 11 AD stored in Latest error code Un G19 6 Setting method of the input signal error detection upper limit value and the input signal error detection lower limit value Set the input signal error detection upper limit value and input signal error detection lower limit value to a value based on the input signal error detection setting value Set in a unit of 1 0 1 Both the input signal error detection upper limit value and the input signal error detection lower limit value reflect the input signal error detection setting value a Input signal error detection upper limit value Th
39. is processed per 400us Sequence scan time Approx 12 5ms 10 0 1 x 25 a rr EEA When the processing time of the interrupt program is longer than the interval of logging load pointer detection interrupts the CPU module fails to capture the logging load pointer detection interrupts To prevent it set the processing time of the interrupt program to a shorter time than the interval of logging load pointer detection interrupts When the CPU module fails to capture a logging load pointer detection interrupt the interrupt program is not processed The following figure and table show the interval of logging load pointer detection interrupts and the processing time of the interrupt ladder program k 2 J Interrupt pointer Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt For 1 gt 2 program e Program programi X Program program For 1 lt 2 i Interrupt program Program Interrupt program l l 2 Because the CPU module is still K performing the interrupt processing at the previous stage logging load pointer detection interrupt is not processed in the CPU module and therefore the interrupt program is not performed No Item Description Interval of logging load 1 pointer detection Logging points x Logging cycle lt _ gt Page 143 Section 8 13 1 6 b interrupts The total time of the overhead time before startup and at termination of the interr
40. it is not reflected just after setting As well as other functions of the display unit turn the CPU module STOP gt RUN gt STOP gt RUN to reflect the setting value 193 smopul eBBueyD anjena Huyjyes Jo IS 6 14 Digital clipping enable disable setting Select DISABLE or ENABLE in the DIGITALCLIP window DIGITALCLIP window 1 Usethe A and w buttons to select DISABLE or ENABLE and confirm with the button 194 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT 9 4 The errors that occurred in the A D converter module can be checked from the display unit In addition the existing error can be cleared Checking and Clearing Errors 1 Checking errors The error that occurred in the A D converter module can be checked by specifying Latest error code Un G19 from BUF MEM MON TES lex When an error occurs in the A D converter module with a start I O number of 10 BUF MEM MON TES window 1 Press the button 4 BUFF MEM ADDR INPUT FORMAT window 2 Use the A and Y buttons to select DEC for the input format of the buffer memory address and a eal _ D 4 BUFF MEM ADDR window 3 Move the cursor using the 4 and p buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons and set the value to 19 Confirm with the button 4 Buffer memory monitor window 4 The error that occurred can be checked in the Buffer memory monitor window 195 sog Bunea pue Huiyoay o vy 6
41. or both channels Conversion enabled for CH2 or CH4 or both channels 2 x ST system time 1 ST indicates the sequence scan time and the system time indicates 1ms CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 Input interval and ON OFF time of Trigger conversion request The following tables list the ON time and OFF time of the items below for turning on Trigger conversion request Turn on and off Trigger conversion request so that the reference values of each item are met e Trigger conversion request input interval e Trigger conversion request ON time Trigger conversion request OFF time a For External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal The following table shows the input interval ON time and OFF time of Trigger conversion request when External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal is set oe Reference value for External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal Trigger conversion request input interval 180uUs Trigger conversion request ON time 40us Trigger conversion request OFF time 40us b For Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 The following table shows the input interval ON time and OFF time of the trigger conversion request when Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 is set item Reference value for Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 Trigger conversion request input interval 2 x ST system time or longer Trigger conversion requ
42. to CH4 User range setting gain value H Un G233 and User range write request YA to read the offset gain values from the source A D converter module then use the buffer memory again to write the values to the destination A D converter module The following describes the procedure for using the buffer memory 177 To restore offset gain values onto a new replaced module Start Vv Sets values in Pass data classification setting Un G200 Vv Turns on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 Vv Records the data stored in Pass data classification setting Un G200 and CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value L Un G202 to CH4 User range settings gain value H Un G233 For the source A D converter module v Turns the power off j A Replaces the A D converter module j v Turns the power on j Vv Writes the recorded data to Pass data classification setting Un G200 and CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value L Un G202 to CH4 User range settings gain value H Un G233 y Turns on User range write request YA y Checks that Offset gain setting mode flag XA For the destination A D converter module is on y Turns off User range write request YA j v Checks that the replaced A D converter module operates with the restored offset gain values A When replacing modules prevent the saved offset
43. 0 After low pass filter Low frequency Mid frequency After band pass filter vv N High frequency After high pass filter Just setting parameters in the intelligent function module allows the function to be used leading to reduced man hours for programming A filtered A D conversion value can be obtained at the same time as the A D conversion is completed Thus the throughput time between A D conversion completion and filter processing being started can be also reduced Measuring flatness Remove the components with different asperity somes Z Sensor s n ule LZ ru UU Workpiece The programming is not required when filtering with To perform the filter processing using The throughput time to perform Using this function reduces digital filtering using a ladder the processing time a program 3000 lines or this function program l peas a E OE ER OERS The time required for ie ceo SiG are required for A D conversion filter processing E D3104 D3100 D dhi gt D3006 E 0 0423 D3106 E D3106 D3100 a Extracting target data The combination of a test sensor and the A D converter module can attenuate unnecessary freque
44. 0 1 513 8116 Fax 358 0 207 463 541 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 UTECO GREECE Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN 5 Mavrogenous Str Box 426 GR 18542 Piraeus SE 20124 Malm Phone 30 211 1206 900 Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 30 211 1206 999 Fax 46 0 40 93 2301 MELTRADE Kft HUNGARY Omni Ray AG SWITZERLAND Fert utca 14 m Sch rli 5 HU 1107 Budapest CH 8600 D bendorf Phone 36 0 1 431 9726 Phone 41 0 44 802 28 80 Fax 36 0 1 431 9727 Fax 41 0 44 802 28 28 Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA GTS TURKEY Ritausmas iela 23 Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok No 5 i LV 1058 Riga TR 34775 Yukar Dudullu Umraniye ISTANBUL Phone 371 0 784 2280 Phone 90 0 216 526 39 90 Fax 371 0 784 2281 Fax 90 0 216 526 3995 Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE Savanoriu Pr 187 4 B M Raskovoyi St LT 02300 Vilnius UA 02660 Kiev Phone 370 0 5 232 3101 Phone 380 0 44 494 33 55 Fax 370 0 5 232 2980 Fax 380 0 44 494 33 66 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V FA European Business Group Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Germany FACTORY AUTOMATION Tel 49 0 2102 4860 Fax 49 0 2102 4861120 info mitsubishi automation com www mitsubishi automation com
45. 1 completed flag EE OFF g for t Un G162 he completion 0 i Start and completion of Start method and Trigger conversion request ae A D conversion completion condition External Trigger Convert i No external trigger request OFF gt Start Request External Input External trigger request ON External trigger convert request Terminal Trigger conversion completed Waiting for the completion 0 gt Completion f flag Un G162 Conversion completed 1 165 uo ouny UOISI9AUOD J266u pL g b When using Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 When Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 is turned from No request 0 to Conversion request 1 the A D converter module processes A D conversion When the A D conversion is completed Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 is turned from Waiting for the completion 0 to Conversion completed 1 Inside trigger Conversion a p Controlled by E request 1 lee the A D converter module request Un G161 No request 0 OFF AID conversion Waiting for A D Waiting for trigger input conversion trigger input Digital operation value 0 Le conversion value ON Trigger conversion Conversion a completed flag completed 1 OFE Un G162 Waiting for the completion 0 Tri 2 T Start and completion of Start method and er conversion reques ga 4 A D conversion completion condition Start Inside trigger convers
46. 3 Checking on the Module Error Collection Function Using the module error collection function stores the errors that occurred in the A D converter module to the CPU module Once being stored the errors remain even after the CPU module is powered off or reset 1 How to check the errors by module error collection function To check the errors of the A D converter module collected by the CPU module open the Error History window KO Diagnostics gt gt System Monitor gt click the button Error History n Status Connection Channel List Stop Monitor Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image Match all of the criteria below 1 Model Name matching L604D4 2GH 2 Start I O matching 0030 Clear Refine Criteria Enter Refine Criteria Error History List Error Details Displayed Errors Errors 4 4 Model Name 00004 L60AD4 2GH Start 1 0 0030 Mount Position Main block Oth slot 2013 02 26 0 L60AD4 2GH 2013 02 26 09 54 59 Error and Solution Inteligent Module Information L60AD4 2GH Explanation The input range fir CH1 is set with a value outside the setting range for Switch 1 of the intelligent Function module switch setting Set a valid value on the intelligent Function module switch setting in the parameter setting Clear History Refresh 2 Errors to be collected The A D converter module reports the errors and alarms desc
47. 40us under the following settings e Averaging process setting Sampling processing e A D conversion enabled channels CH1 CH3 Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling cycle 404s cycle 404s cycle 404s cycle 404 s Conversion Conversion A D conversion processing processing for processing for X of the module CH1 CH3 CH1 CH3 c CH1 Digital output value Un G11 e ECHI Conversion N value for CH3 Conversion processing for CH1 CH3 Conversion processing for CH1 CH3 Conversion value for CH1 CH3 Digital output value Un G13 value for CH3 value for CH3 Ex The sampling cycle is 80us under the following settings e Averaging process setting Sampling processing e A D conversion enabled channels CH1 CH2 Sampling cycle 80 u s Sampling cycle 804 s Doct gt i Conversion speed i Conversion speed Conversion speed i Conversion speed for CH1 CH3 404s ifor CH2 CH4 40 us for CH1 CH3 40u s for CH2 CH4 404 sy Conversion processing 1 1 Conversion Conversion 1 for CH2 1 1 1 1 1 1 processing processing Conversion i for CH2 i for CH1 i processing I i A D conversion processing x i for CH1 i of the module Conversion value for CH1 Conversion value for CH1 Conversion value for CH1 CH1 Digital output value Un G11 CH2 Digital output value Un G12 Conversion value for CH2 Conve
48. 50 times in accordance with IEC 61131 2 Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction Before handling the module touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibit
49. 57 7 3 Parameter Setting Set the parameters of each channel By setting the parameters the setting by programming becomes unnecessary 1 Setting procedure Open the Parameter window 1 Start Parameter XS Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt gt module name c gt Parameter W 0010 1 60AD4 2GH Parameter Display Fiter Display All zl Item CHI cHe cHS CHE ELT Sets Tell OT AD ONEA n agran 0 Enable 0 Enable enable disable setting Items to be selected from i cong net ran Time Average Count ull down menus Average Moving Average Tine a o o p fiter constant Set value for the Digital filter Setting range for each item will be changed according to sampling cycle Set the value based on the conditions described in guidance Digital filte setting Current sampling cycle and setting range are as follows Sampling Period 80us Setting Range 0 to GOOOH Attenuation band width one one one oe Low pass filter Set value for the Low pass filter LPF Pass band edge ng ra ee be Migh pass fiter Set value for the High pass filter Ae one one one one Set value for the Band pass filter Panes brdn orz orz orz orz Warning output function Sets for warnings on A D conversion Process alarm upper upper limit o o alue Process alarm upper lower limit value a a Items to be entered in the text boxes SS value a B Process alarm lower lower limit value a
50. CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 is Converting difference 1 during difference conversion and is Not converted 0 before difference conversion 34 Pass data classification setting Un G200 This area saves and restores the offset gain setting value in user range setting Specify if the offset gain setting value to be saved or restored is either voltage or current b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO o o fo JoJo foto foo jofo o fonensjenzjcn NSS ee Data for b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 User range Even when the value is set bi polar voltage the setting value is ignored 1 User range uni polar current 35 CH1 Industrial shipment setting offset value L Un G202 to CH4 User range setting gain value H Un G233 This area restores the offset gain setting value in user range setting When the offset gain setting of the user range setting is restored the data used is stored with the following operation e Writing the initial setting by programming tool e Turning on Operating condition setting request Y9y Turning on User range write request YA in offset gain setting mode 4 The data is not saved when the setting value is written to Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 When restoring the offset gain setting value in user range setting set the data saved in this area to the same area in the A D converter module where the data is restored For the setting procedur
51. CHO Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1169 is cleared to 0 275 sessalppy Alowey yng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 56 CHO Loading interrupt enable disable setting Un G1200 to Un G1203 Set whether the logging load detection function is enabled or disabled for each channel Generates an interrupt to the CPU module by setting a read pointer each time the number of data equal to the logging load points setting value is logged while CHO Loading interrupt enable disable setting Un G1200 to Un G1203 is set to Enable 0 For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Disable 1 All channels Point A channel where a value other than Enable 0 and Disable 1 is set brings about an error Error code 2500 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on Logging cannot be performed The interrupt pointer to be used is preset but can be changed To change the interrupt pointer set the corresponding interrupt pointer with PLC Parameter of GX Works2 57 CHO Logging load points setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 An interrupt is generated to the CPU module each time the number of data equal to the set points is stored for each channel For details
52. Common lt SH 080779ENG 13JU63 gt System configuration parameter settings and online operations of GX Works2 which are common to Simple projects and Structured projects GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual lt SH 080373E 13JU41 gt Operating methods of GX Developer such as programming printing monitoring and debugging Memo CONTENTS SAEEMYSPREGA WIIOIN S E wes aye E wae eae ey ee ge a A nc NS A 1 CONDIMONS OES Ede Relic Ears U0 CITE eee arses eae E 5 NTRODUC TION pena eee ar en SP we eS Pra ane PR eee oe ee a nr te eee aA 6 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 000000 c ee euee 7 REEEVANTRMANWALS ees acer tire anes en ow eee WME PNM tire E E ay ee Pe amor ya 8 MANUAEPAGE O RGANIZATI Nitrate cae entre Saat re Sas ged ee Pee pace ar ee ge aE 13 RERMS TET E dence ban ae tee shen Pasa 00 aS nade teins We cRaSl A A E Naty Tad oe ene Saha ECTS Pe sid 16 PAGKING ILIS TEEI A ae arse oe seminar ap hemes E Pp ened Se eee ie Sner go Pea SO ee SE EIN AA Sy Pee Sc ee EE 16 CHAPTER 1 A D CONVERSION MODULE 17 44 SApplicationi 400 teehee Boe dae Were a eR ee ae Pe es 17 12 SRE AtUreS tec cristed ath aandtot twee bt aca oda Whe saan hes Bet De edt ae ake 18 t2 Maint atures d dui5 hs a Ea a hats Gente anh ay wae PRR E S A A A 18 1 2 2 Advantages with the main features 00 0 ccc cee eee eens 20 123 Other features co Soc rnea uei wing Aether oe a
53. DISABLE or ENABLE in the PROCESS ALARM window PROCESS ALARM window 1 4 PRALARM UPR UPR window 2 4 PRALARM UPR LWR window 3 4 PRALARM LWR UPR window 4 4 PRALARM LWR LWR window 5 Table of input items Use the A and W buttons to select DISABLE or ENABLE and confirm with the button When ENABLE is selected follow the rest of the procedure Move the cursor using the 4 and p gt buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Move the cursor using the lt and buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Move the cursor using the 4 and p buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Move the cursor using the lt and gt buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button f Input range Input item Input upper limit Input lower limit PRALARM UPR UPR PRALARM UPR LWR 32767 32768 PRALARM LWR UPR PRALARM LWR LWR 190 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT 10 Rate alarm setting Select DISABLE or ENABLE in the RATE ALARM window RATE ALARM window 1 Use the A and Y buttons to select DISABLE or ENABLE and confirm with the button
54. Data section Sign bit 1 Negative 0 Positive a Setting range The setting range is between 32768 and 32767 Point The difference conversion reference value is updated when CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 is turned from No request 0 to Trigger request 1 Even if CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 is turned from Converting difference 1 to Not converted 0 CHO Difference conversion reference value Un G180 to Un G183 is not cleared 259 sessalppy Aiowe Jeng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 33 CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 Difference conversion status can be checked with this flag For details on the difference conversion function refer to the following e Difference Conversion Function gt Page 126 Section 8 12 CHO Difference conversion status flag Difference conversion status Un G190 to Un G193 Not converted 0 Converting difference 1 e When CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 is turned from No request 0 to Trigger request 1 CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 is turned to Converting difference 1 e When CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 is turned from Trigger request 1 to No request 0 CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 is turned from Converting difference 1 to Not converted 0 The setting in
55. ERR INPUT SIG VALUE SCALING SCALE UP LIMIT SCALE LOW LIMIT SHIFT DIGITALCLIP 4 The shift function is enabled by turning the CPU module STOP RUN gt STOP gt RUN as well as other modules CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT 2 Window transitions up to the initial setting change window The following diagram shows how the windows transition to the initial setting change window uonisues NU W Z 6 183 Standby window 2009 04 20 MON 12 00 00 Function selection window CPU SETTINGS gt MOD MON TEST MOD SETTINGS Module setting_module D Module setting_start I O specification window No specification window MENU gt MOD SET SPECIFY 1 0 No MODULE LIST Module setting_module selection window 01 1 0 No 0010H BLT IN CC Link 02 1 0 No 0030H L60AD4 2GH Change item selection menu window A D CONVERSION AVE PROCESSING TI ME COUNT MOV LPF PASS BAND HPF PASS BAND BPF PASS BAND L BPF PASS BAND H ATTENUATE BAND Initial setting change window INIT CHANGE Parameter valid drive confirmation window A D conversion enable disable setting window A D CONVERS ON ENABLE DISABLE Time count moving average time lag filter setting window TIME COUNT MOV 00000 HPF Pass band edge frequency window HPF PASS BAND 00000 BPF Pass band edge frequency High window BPF PASS BAND H 00000 Initial setting change window Process a
56. FUNCTIONS 6 Setting procedure a Sampling processing 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable W Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name lt gt Parameter Item CHI E Basic setting Sets method of A D ci A conversion enable disable setting O Enable ie Averaging process setting O Enable Time Average Count 2 Set Averaging process setting to 0 Sampling Processing Averaging process setting O Sampling 0 Time Average Count 0 Sampling Processing Average Moving Average Time lag 1 Time Average filter constant 2 Count Average 3 Moving Average 4 Primary Delay Filter Digital filte setting S Low Pass Filter 6 High Pass Filter 7 Band Pass Filter 89 poya UOISIeAUOD C V 48 90 b Averaging processing and Time lag filter Ex When Averaging process setting is set to 1 Time Average 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable XS Project window gt Intelligent Function Module lt gt module name gt Parameter Item CHI E Basic setting Sets method of A D ci A D conversion a enable disable setting O Enable X Averaging process setting Time Average Count O Enable Set Averaging process setting to 1 Time Average Averaging process setting Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Digital filte setting 1 Time Average xj 0 Sampling Processing 1 Ti
57. G1003 is set to Disable 1 the settings for CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 and CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 are ignored 267 sessaippy Low y Jeng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 268 45 CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 When the logging function is used set the number of data points recorded from the rise of hold trigger a request to stop logging to logging holding stops for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function lt gt Page 130 Section 8 13 a Setting range The setting range is between 1 and 10000 b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is 5000 All channels Point A channel where a value out of the above setting range is set brings about an error Error code 2040 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on Logging cannot be performed When CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Disable 1 the setting for CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 is ignored APPENDICES 46 CHO Hold trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 Set the hold trigger condition to be used by the logging function for each channel e To use the hold trigger request set CHO Hold trigger
58. G1067 When the logging function is used set the buffer memory address monitored for the condition of level trigger rising for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function lt gt Page 130 Section 8 13 a Setting range The setting range is between 0 and 4999 b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value Channel Default value Buffer memory to be monitored CH1 54 CH1 Digital operation value Un G54 CH2 55 CH2 Digital operation value Un G55 CH3 56 CH3 Digital operation value Un G56 CH4 57 CH4 Digital operation value Un G57 Point A channel where a value out of the above setting range is set brings about an error Error code 2060 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on Logging cannot be performed Set CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G14 CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 or a buffer memory address with R in List of Buffer Memory Addresses to CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 Buffer memory address system area etc with R W or W in List of Buffer Memory Addresses For the details on the buffer memory address refer to the following List of Buffer Memory Addresses 3 Page 32 Section 3 5 APPENDICES 48 Level data O Un
59. G1810 to Un G1969 A maximum of 16 errors and alarms can be stored 1 Process of the error history function The error code and the error time are stored in the buffer memory address starting from error history No 1 start address Un G1810 and sequentially thereafter Error time is stored as follows Ex For Error history No 1 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G1810 Error code Un G1811 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G1812 Month Day Un G1813 Hour Minute Un G1814 Second Day of the week Un G1815 to System area Un G1819 Storage Item Storage contents 4 example First two digits of the year Last two digits 20114 of the year Month Day Stored in BCD code 3294 Hour Minute 10354 Second 404 One of the following values is stored for each day of the week in BCD code e Sunday 0 Monday 1 Day of the week e Tuesday 2 Wednesday 3 2H e Thursday 4 Friday 5 e Saturday 6 1 Those are values when an error occurs at 10 35 40 on Tuesday March 29th 2011 170 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 2 Checking the error history The start address of the error history where the latest error is stored can be checked in Latest address of error history Un G1800 1 When the third error occurs The third error is stored in Error history No 3 and the value 1830 start address of Error history No 3 is stored to Latest address of error history Un G1800 Lat
60. G44999 132 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS c When logging data stored in the buffer memory of the A D converter module is transferred to the file registers of the CPU module ex When 1000 points of the latest logging data are transferred to the device memory of the CPU module every time 1000 points of data are logged Buffer memory of the L60AD4 2GH Transfer Device memory of the CPU module f 1 to 1000th data 1 to 1000th data Logging data Saved L 1001 to 2000th data 1001 to 2000th data Logging data Not saved _ 2001 to 3000th data 3001 to 4000th data 4001 to 5000th data P i a 5001 to 6000th data Logging data Waiting for logging 6001 to 7000th data 7001 to 8000th data 8001 to 9000th data 9001 to 10000th data 4 Logging data setting Select data type for each channel with CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1027 Digital output value 0 e Digital operation value 1 uonoun4 Bui6607 48 133 134 5 Logging cycle Set the logging cycle for each channel with CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 and CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 Set the logging intervals to CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 and the unit of the logging intervals to CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 Setting value of CHO Logging cycle unit setting
61. GO Zn Others data Bit Word Bit Word K H O O 3 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Un Start I O number of module 0 to FE BIN 16 bits Within the range of Start number of device where the control data is stored Device name specified device Device which turns on for one scan at the processing completion of the dedicated Within the range of instruction a Bit specified device In error completion 1 also turns on 1 Specify the device specified to S on execution of the G P OGLOAD instruction Do not change the data which is read out by the G P OGLOAD instruction If the data is changed the normal operation may not be ensured 292 2 Control data APPENDICES Device Item Setting data peting Set by range System area S The status on instruction completion is stored 1 Completion status 0 Normal completion System Other than 0 Error completion error code The value which is set for Pass data classification setting S 2 by the G P OGLOAD instruction is restored 00004 to 2 Pass data classification setting _ range bi polar ede 000F System User range uni polar current b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 0 1 0 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 3 System area S 4 CH1 Industrial shipmen
62. L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual 2 Compatible software version For the compatible software versions refer to the following Software Version GX Works2 Version 1 98C or later 5 3 Restrictions when the A D Converter Module Is Connected to a Head Module The following describes the restriction when the A D converter module is connected to a head module e Dedicated instructions cannot be used 48 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING This chapter describes the installation and wiring of the A D converter module 6 1 Installation Environment and Installation Position For precautions for installation environment and installation position refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual uolIsod UOHe e Su pue JUsWUOMIAUZ uogeesu p9 49 6 2 Terminal Block 1 Precautions Tighten the terminal block screws within the following specified torque range Screw type Tightening torque range Terminal screw M3 screw 0 42 to 0 58N m Terminal block mounting screw M3 5 screw 0 66 to 0 89N m The following table lists applicable solderless terminals connected to the terminal block When wiring use applicable wires and an appropriate tightening torque Use UL approved solderless terminals and for processing use a
63. Level data 4 0 R W 38 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Address F decimal hexadecimal Nome Default Read Write 1077 4354 Level data 5 0 R W 1078 4364 Level data 6 0 R W 1079 4374 Level data 7 0 R W 1080 4384 Level data 8 0 R W 1081 4394 Level data 9 0 R W 1082 43Auy CH1 Trigger setting value 0 R W 1083 43By CH2 Trigger setting value 0 R W 1084 43Cy CH3 Trigger setting value 0 R W 1085 43D4 CH4 Trigger setting value 0 R W 1086 43Ey to to System area 1089 4414 1090 4424 CH1 Head pointer 0 R 1091 4434 CH2 Head pointer 0 R 1092 4444 CH3 Head pointer 0 R 1093 4454 CH4 Head pointer 0 R 1094 4464 to to System area 1097 4494 1098 44Ay CH1 Latest pointer 0 R 1099 44By CH2 Latest pointer 0 R 1100 44Cy CH3 Latest pointer 0 R 1101 44Dy CH4 Latest pointer 0 R 1102 44Ey to to System area 1105 4514 1106 4524 CH1 Number of logging data 0 R 1107 4534 CH2 Number of logging data 0 R 1108 4544 CH3 Number of logging data 0 R 1109 4554 CH4 Number of logging data 0 R 1110 456p to to System area 1113 4594 1114 45Auy CH1 Trigger pointer 0 R 1115 45By CH2 Trigger pointer 0 R 1116 45Cy CH3 Trigger pointer 0 R 1117 45D4 CH4 Trigger pointer 0 R 1118 45Ey to to System area 1121 4614 1122 4624 s 0 1123 4634 CH1 Logging cycle monitor value ms 0 1124 4644 us 0
64. Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 fo o ofo olol fofo o o o o cHacHslcHalcHi Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 fo o ofofofo ofo o o o o cHacualcHalcHi ee N Data for b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 1 Setting target channel 0 Disabled a Default value The default value is 0000 Point The settings for multiple channels can be configured at the same time However set either of Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 or Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 to Disabled 0 When the settings for both of them are configured at the same time an error occurs The error code 500 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on For details on the offset gain setting refer to the following Offset gain Setting gt Page 62 Section 7 5 APPENDICES 9 Averaging process setting Un G24 Configure the setting when selecting sampling or averaging processing for each channel Averaging processing includes time average count average moving average time lag filter low pass filter high pass filter and band pass filter b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Processing method Setting value Sampling processing OH Time average 1H Count average H Moving average Time lag filter Low pass filter High pass filter s OD oj A wl N aL Ba
65. P OFFGAN or Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 Module READY X0 turns off then on Note the initial setting process is performed at the switching of the mode if a sequence program executes the initial setting when Module READY X0 turns on To validate the intelligent function module switch setting after writing the setting to the CPU module reset the CPU module or power off then on the module 2 Program example a Device Ex I O number of the A D converter module is X Y30 to X Y3F when the L26CPU BT is used The following table lists the devices used in the program example Device Function MO Offset gain range specification uni polar current M1 Offset gain range specification bi polar voltage M2 Channel selection M3 Offset setting M4 Gain setting M5 Channel change command M6 Write command to module of offset gain setting value M7 Mode switching DO Storage device for the specified channel D1 Storage device for the setting value of the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN D2 Storage device for the specified user range Point If the LO2CPU is used assign I O of the A D converter module to X Y30 to X Y3F so that the I O assignment of the A D converter module is the same as that in the above system 66 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS b Switching the mode by the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN This program performs the following e Switching
66. The normal A D conversion is performed in this mode The input analog values are converted into digital values b External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal and Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory The trigger conversion is performed in this mode The input analog values are converted into digital values according to the input of Trigger conversion request For details on the trigger conversion function refer to the following Trigger Conversion Function gt Page 162 Section 8 14 sapo 18 2 Offset gain setting mode The offset gain setting is performed in this mode For details on the offset gain setting refer to the following e Offset gain Setting gt Page 62 Section 7 5 69 3 Mode transitions The following figure and table describe the transition condition for each mode At the power on or at the 5 reset of the CPU module 2 1 Offset Gain Setting Mode Trigger conversion mode Normal A D Converter Processing Mode No Transition condition Set Drive Mode Setting to Normal A D Converter Processing Mode and A D Conversion Timing to Normal Internal Scan in Switch Setting of GX Works2 Set Drive Mode Setting to Offset Gain Setting Mode and A D Conversion Timing to Normal Internal Scan in Switch Setting of GX Works2 Perform G P OFFGAN Argument 0 normal output mode Set the following val
67. Un G1003 to Disable 1 4 Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 is set to a value Set No request 0 or Conversion request 1 in 2201 other than No request 0 and Conversion request 1 Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 4 Trigger conversion completed clear request Un G163 is set toa Set No request 0 or Clear request 1 in Trigger 2202 value other than No request 0 and Clear request 1 conversion completed clear request Un G163 Set the values of CHO LPF Pass band edge frequency Un G300 to Un G303 and CHO Attenuation band width Un G332 to Un G335 within the following setting range When the sampling cycle is 40 us The values of CHO LPF Pass band edge frequency Un G300 to Pass band edge frequency Attenuation band 2300 Un G303 and CHO Attenuation band width Un G332 to width lt 12000 Un G335 are set beyond the setting range 330 lt Attenuation band width The channel where the error has occurred fits in O 0 lt Pass band edge frequency When the sampling cycle is 80 us e Pass band edge frequency Attenuation band width lt 6000 e 170 lt Attenuation band width e 0 lt Pass band edge frequency Set the values of CHO HPF Pass band edge frequency Un G308 to Un G311 and CHO Attenuation band width Un G332 to Un G335 within the following setting range When the sampling cycle is 40 us The values of CHO HPF Pass band edge frequency Un G308 to 0 lt Pass band edge frequency At
68. Un G118 to Un G121 1 eee ee eee 253 CHO Rate alarm lower limit value Un G127 Un G129 Un G131 Un G133 253 CHO Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 Un G128 Un G130 Un G132 253 CHO Scaling lower limit value Un G62 Un G64 Un G66 Un G68 251 CHO Scaling upper limit value Un G63 Un G65 Un G67 Un G69 251 CHO Shifting amount to conversion value Un G150 to Un G153 2 ee eee 255 CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Un G1 to Un G4 240 CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 270 CHO Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1169 Pita ince APs Senta E E E cara heen E E Aa 275 CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1117 274 CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1085 has aea dd Savas whbiedn da head ater k dR AMa cast ai 271 Conversion cycle 00 0 cece eee eee 75 Conversion speed 20000 eee eee 74 Count average n n aaaea 77 Current input characteristic 282 301 D Difference conversion function 126 Digital clipping enable disable setting Un G29 246 Digital clipping function 122 Digitalifiltlers cshsctege beets Beale eat 80 Digital operation values 00 0 72 Digital output values 1 noaa anaana ee 72 Disconnection detection 20 98 E Error clear function 2 00005 174 Error clear request Y
69. Y9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Disabled 1 All channels 19 CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 A digital operation value obtained by the digital clipping function scaling function shift function or difference conversion function is stored in 16 bit signed binary b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO eE EAT Id ha v J Data section Sign bit 1 Negative 0 Positive Point When the digital clipping function scaling function shift function or difference conversion function is not used the same value as the one in CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G14 is stored APPENDICES 20 CHO Scaling lower limit value Un G62 Un G64 Un G66 Un G68 CHO Scaling upper limit value Un G63 Un G65 Un G67 Un G69 Set the range of scale conversion for each channel For details on the scaling function refer to the following e Scaling Function gt Page 110 Section 8 9 a Setting range Setting range 32000 to 32000 scaling upper limit value gt scaling lower limit value b Enabling the setting A Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is 0 All channels Point When a value set to a channel is out of the setting range above or a value not satisfying scaling upper limit value gt scaling lower limit value an error occurs at the channel
70. b b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is 0 All channels sessalppy Alowey Jeyng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 263 264 40 CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 Set whether the logging is enabled or disabled for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 Logging enable disable setting Setting value Enable 0 Disable 1 a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Disable 1 All channels Point Enabling the setting starts the logging A channel where a value other than the above values is set brings about an error Error code 2000 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on Logging cannot be performed APPENDICES 41 CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 Use Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 as a trigger to hold stop the logging at any timing during the logging for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 Logging hold request Setting value OFF 0 ON 1 a Operation of the logging hold processing
71. bl yde setting 1 Times 1 Times 1 Times 1 Times pate abn 00 00 00 oo Sets whether to permit or prohibit output of A D conversion value 2 Double click the item to change the setting and input the setting value Items to be input from the pull down list Double click the item to be set to display the pull down list Select the item Items to be input from the text box Double click the item to be set and input the setting value 3 For setting CH2 to CH4 follow the operation of step 2 Item Setting value Reference A D conversion enable 0 Enable default value Page 73 disable setting 1 Disable Section 8 3 0 Sampling Processing default value 1 Time Average 2 Count Average 3 Moving Average Averaging process setting 3 4 Primary Delay Filter Basic setting 5 Low Pass Filter 6 High Pass Filter Page 74 7 Band Pass Filter Section 8 4 Time Average 2 to 5000ms default value 0 Time Average Count Count Average 4 to 65000 times default value 0 Average Moving Average Moving Average 2 to 1000 times default value 0 Time lag filter constant Primary Delay Filter 1 to 500 times default value 0 i 58 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS Item Setting value Reference o 40us 330 to 12000Hz default value OHz Attenuation band width 80us 170 to 6000Hz default value OHz LPF Pass band 40us 0
72. eee ee eee 57 T Time average 6 ce ees 77 Timelag fiter aeaii ern be ands regen a va dogg 79 Trigger conversion completed clear request Un G163 stad BR sa arpa Skt A AO Aad mA BE 258 Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 257 Trigger conversion function 162 U Upper limit detection 0 97 User range write request YA 239 V Voltage input characteristic 280 WwW Warning output flag process alarm Un G50 249 Warning output flag rate alarm Un G51 249 Warning output setting Un G48 248 Warning output signal X8 232 INSTRUCTION INDEX G G P OFFGAN 0 000 cece eee eee eee 286 G P OGLOAD oe oie eu nk ae elas 288 GP OC ST ORG a2 emne a ia EE 292 303 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover February 2013 SH NA 081103ENG A First edition 0 edition Japanese manual version SH 081102 A This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 304 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Grat
73. equivalent to the gain value to be set wesboud e wouy Buas Z S Check that Offset gain setting mode flag XA is on Set the channel to adjust the gain to Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 More than one channel can be set simultaneously Note that Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 must be set as 0 though Switch to the normal mode End 4 The following shows the procedure for switching the mode normal mode gt offset gain setting mode normal mode Dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN lt _ gt Page 286 Appendix 5 2 i Setting for Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 gt Page 255 Appendix 2 26 Intelligent function module switch setting gt Page 57 Section 7 2 65 Point Configure the offset gain setting in accordance with the actual use situation Offset and gain values are recorded in the flash memory in the A D converter module by turning on then off User range write request YA Once recorded the values are not deleted even after the module is powered off When the values are written 26 times in succession an error occurs and error code 162 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 to prevent an improper write to the flash memory Error flag XF turns on and the ERR LED turns on Configure the offset gain setting in th
74. gain value data from being deleted by one of the following methods before powering off the module Use latch settings for the internal device of the destination module Save the data onto an SD memory card To write data use the SP FWRITE instruction To read data use the SP FREAD instruction Store the saved data 178 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS To apply the offset gain values set in one module to the other modules Start Sets values in Pass data classification setting Un G200 Turns on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 For the source A D converter module Records the data stored in Pass data classification setting Un G200 and CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value L Un G202 to CH4 User range settings gain value H Un G233 Writes the recorded data to Pass data classification setting Un G200 and CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value L Un G202 to CH4 User range settings gain value H Un G233 Turns off User range write request YA A For the destination A D converter module Checks that Offset gain setting mode flag XA is on Turns on User range write request YA Checks that the replaced A D converter module operates with the restored offset gain values End sane uleBAesyoO Bunozs y pue Bunes g g 179 3 Range reference tables The following describes the reference r
75. gt Process alarm upper lower limit value gt Process alarm lower upper limit value gt Process alarm lower lower limit value 104 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 8 2 Rate alarm When a change rate of a digital output value is equal to or more than the rate alarm upper limit value s or the rate is equal to or less than the rate alarm lower limit value s a warning is output Rate alarm varning CH1 Digital output value sa detection A ea output period Rate alarm 1 1 i warning i i i Time Change rate of detection i i digital output period value SE EEA EEEE E se em ere ee en ene tS EE Rate alarm limit Change of upper CH1 Digital valle output value 0 Me a aia RENEA EEEE EEREN AE RENEE A AERE EEE EE Rate alarm lower limit value CH1 Warning output flag Rate alarm upper limit value Un G51 b0 OFF OFF CH1 Warning output flag 1 Rate alarm lower limit OFF H value Un G51 b1 i r i i y 1 ON ON Warning output signal X8 OFF a 4 OFF a al OFF Boras gt Controlled by the A D converter module 1 105 weje 3ey 7388 uonouny nd no buiueMm g8 106 1 2 3 Operation when a warning is output Digital output values are monitored on the rate alarm detection cycle and when a change rate of a digital output value from a previous value is equal to or more than the rate alarm upper limit value s or the rate
76. hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 is ON 1 2 Checking logging data Refer to the following lt Page 149 Section 8 13 2 3 157 3 Resuming the logging To resume the logging set CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 to OFF 0 After logging resumes collected data is stored from the head buffer memory area of the logging data storage area In addition OFF 0 is stored in CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 Outside input trigger CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 s y Logging after Y Logging status Logging x ee erection x Logging held x Logging After logging resumes set CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 to ON 1 a Buffer memory status when logging resumes Refer to the following L gt Page 153 Section 8 13 3 3 a 158 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 13 6 Setting method of a hold trigger a request to stop logging 1 Setting procedure 7 Start Set the following items Logging enable disable setting Logging data setting Logging cycle setting value Logging cycle unit setting Logging points after trigger YES Is a level trigger used Set the following items Level trigger condition setting Trigger data Trigger setting va
77. hold request Level data 0 Level data 1 Level data 2 Level data 3 Level data 4 Level data 5 Level data 6 Level data 7 Level data 8 Level data 9 Transfer data of the specified device to buffer memory ysoyoy ony yZ Transfer Direction Intelligent Function Module lt PLC Buffer Memory Address 1010 3F2h Transfer Word Counts 1 Write area for logging hold request in logging Function Point Available devices are X Y M L B T C ST D W R and ZR When a bit device X Y M L or B is used set the number that is divisible by 16 points example X10 Y120 M16 Data in the buffer memory are stored in 16 points of devices from the set device No Example When X10 is set the data are stored in X10 to X1F 61 7 5 Offset gain Setting When using the user range setting uni polar current or user range setting bi polar voltage configure the offset gain setting with the following operations When the industrial shipment setting is used the offset gain setting is not required The offset gain setting can be configured by the following two types of operations Setting from Offset Gain Setting of GX Works2 Setting from a program 7 5 1 Setting from Offset Gain Setting of GX Works2 1 Setting procedure Open the Offset Gain Setting window Xf Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Analog Module gt Offset Gain Setting 1 Select the module to configur
78. i A 6th data MD ites TEEI S ERETON Ai Invalid data i i 9999th data Data stored in this area is not reliable 9999th data 10000th data Y 10000th data W E The number of logging data in CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 increases by one every time a new point is stored When all the addresses of the logging data storage area are filled the next data is stored in the first address of the logging data storage area The logging operation continues overwriting the existing data 135 uonouny Bui6607 48 8 Checking logging data without stopping the logging operation Logging data can be checked during logging operation with CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1101 and CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 To check logging data adjust the logging cycle to prevent the logging data from being refreshed while the data is read out In addition check the following precautions Set CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 to the cycle that data checking and reading surely complete before logging data is refreshed If the logging cycle is short logging data may be refreshed while checking and reading data e After obtaining the logging data which need to be checked monitor the variation of CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 and CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 Obtain logging data after the stored value changes
79. lower limit value 0 R W 97 61H CH3 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W 98 624 CH4 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W 99 63H CH4 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W 100 644 CH4 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W 101 654 CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W 102 664 to to System area 117 754 118 76H CH1 Rate alarm detection cycle setting value 1 R W 119 77y CH2 Rate alarm detection cycle setting value 1 R W 120 78H CH3 Rate alarm detection cycle setting value 1 R W 121 794 CH4 Rate alarm detection cycle setting value 1 R W 122 7Ay to to System area 125 7Dy 126 7Ey CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W 127 7Fy CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W 128 804 CH2 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W 129 814 CH2 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W 130 824 CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W 131 83H CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W 132 844 CH4 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W 133 854 CH4 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W 134 864 to to System area 141 8D 142 8Ey CH1 Input signal error detection setting value 50 R W 143 8Fy CH2 Input signal error detection setting value 50 R W 144 904 CH3 Input signal error detection setting value 50 R W 145 914 CH4 Input signal error detection setting value 50 R W 146 924 to to System area 149 95y 150 964 CH1 Shifting amount to conversion value 0 R W 151 974 CH2 Shifting amount to conversion value 0 R W 152 984 CH3 Shifting amount to c
80. of the external trigger terminal does not turn off Check item Action Input by a switch with LED display Connect a proper resistor so that the current which flows in the A D converter module is lower than the OFF current L60AD4 2GH LGOAD4 2GH DDAN e TRG TRG l l leakage current resistor UN lt 4 up GND AF GND Sneak current caused by two power supplies Use one power supply only Connect a diode to prevent the sneak current Refer to the following figure L60AD4 2GH L60AD4 2GH TRG TRG e E1 E2 4 GND itle _ GND 8 When an incorrect value is input from the external trigger terminal due to noise Check item Action Noise may be taken as an input value Take the following measures Do not tie the power cables and I O cables to prevent excessive noise Attach absorbers to the noise source such as relays or conductors used by the same power supply to suppress the noise 230 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 7 Checking the Status of the A D Converter Module by the System Monitor To check the LED status or the setting status of the intelligent function module switch setting select the H W information of the A D converter module on the system monitor of GX Works2 1 Hardware LED information The LED status is displayed
81. off Channel change request vg i eas RST Y3B Y3B E a Registers the result of offset gain setting to the module i D me X3A FSET Y3 1 Turns on User range write 1 3 Mm request Y3A X3A A Turns off User range write i RST SA request Y3A Switches to the normal mode M7 Stores the setting data of the MOV KO D1 J dedicated instruction G OFFGAN in D1 G OFFGAN U3 D1 Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN X3A Processing in normal mode END Point The part enclosed by the dotted line is common to the following three programs Switching the mode by the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN Switching the mode by setting Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and by Operating condition setting request Y9 e Switching the mode by the intelligent function module switch setting 67 c Switching the mode by setting Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and by Operating condition setting request Y9 Switches to the offset gain setting mode M7 U3 IA r Sets 4144H to Mode it MOV H4144 G158 1 switching setting 1 U3 G158 rmov H964 isg J Sets 0964H to Mode z switching setting 2 U3 G159 r q Turns on Operating condition LSET v33 setting request Y39 yP x RST Y39 Turns off Operating condition setting request Y39 Common program Switches to the normal mode M7 U3 mn r Sets 096
82. on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 a Setting range The setting range is between 10 and 10000 b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is 1000 All channels Point A channel where a value out of the above setting range is set brings about an error Error code 2510 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on Logging cannot be performed Seta value whose integral multiple is 10000 When a value whose integral multiple does not become 10000 is set for CHO Logging load point setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 the actual logging load point becomes a maximum value whose integral multiple is 10000 within the set range The value set in CHO Logging load points setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 is stored in CHO Logging load points monitor value Un G1232 to Un G1235 276 APPENDICES 58 CHO This logging load pointer Un G1216 to Un G1219 In the interrupt processing with the logging load detection function used the head pointer read from CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 is stored The stored value is calculated by the following formula each time the number of data equal to the logging load points monitor value is logged This logging load pointer Latest pointer Logging load points mo
83. on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 b15 to bO Un G1122 s Un G1123 ms Un G1124 US Ex When the calculated value of logging cycle in CH1 is 6960us Buffer memory address Stored value Un G1122 0 s Un G1123 6 ms Un G1124 960 us 274 55 CHO Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1169 The time that the hold trigger a request to stop logging is detected is recorded For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 APPENDICES b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G1154 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G1155 Month Day Un G1156 Hour Minute Un G1157 Second Day of the week Storage Item Storage contents 4 example First two digits of the year E 20114 Last two digits of the year Month Day Stored in BCD code 3294 Hour Minute 10354 Second 404 One of the following values is stored for each day of the week in BCD code Sunday 0 Monday 1 Day of the week 2H e Tuesday 2 Wednesday 3 e Thursday 4 Friday 5 e Saturday 6 4 Those are values when a hold trigger a request to stop logging is detected at 10 35 40 on Tuesday March 29th 2011 Point Time units shorter than one second are not recorded When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is turned from ON 1 to OFF 0
84. output setting Un G48 b8 to Un G48 b11 an error occurs Warning output function rate alarm 2200 The logging function cannot be used Logging function When Enable 0 is set in CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 an error occurs The shift function cannot be used Shift function f ma e eer When the shift function is set the setting is ignored The difference conversion function cannot be used When Trigger request 1 is set in CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 the setting is ignored Difference conversion function 4 Error code 2200 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on uonouN UOISI9AUOD JOBBUL pL g 163 164 3 Operation of the trigger conversion function By setting A D conversion enabled channels or other necessary settings and turning off then on Operating condition setting request Y9 trigger input gets ready to be accepted When Trigger conversion request is turned on once analog values are converted into digital values in all the A D conversion enabled channels Ex The following figure shows the operation between Trigger conversion request is turned on and Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 is turned from Waiting for the completion 0 to Conversion completed 1 with the condition below A D conversion enabled channels 1CH 2CH 3CH 4CH The
85. range extended mode function When either of following conditions is satisfied Input signal error detection flag Un G49 turns on and a disconnection occurs Input range Disconnection detection condition 4 to 20mA Extended mode Input analog value lt 2mA 1 to 5V Extended mode Input analog value lt 0 5V Analog input value A 2mA or 0 5V Error detection gt Time The setting for CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G145 is ignored Notifying input signal error When an analog input value satisfies a preset detection condition of the detection method the error is notified with Input signal error detection flag Un G49 Input signal error detection signal XC and flashing of ALM LED In addition alarm code 11 AD is stored in Latest error code Un G19 The value of the alarm code varies depending on the condition upper limit lower limit or disconnection detection under which an error of the analog input value is detected 1AQ0 KH Fixed The channel where an input signal error has occurred The detection method 1 Upper limit detection 2 Lower limit detection 3 Disconnection detection For details on the alarm codes refer to the following e Alarm Code List lt gt Page 226 Section 11 5 Operation of the input signal error detection function An error detected channel holds the digital value just before the error was detected and A D conversion
86. request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is 0 All channels Point A channel where a value other than the above values is set brings about an error Error code 2310 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on sessalppy Alowey yng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 261 38 CHO BPF Pass band edge frequency Low Un G316 Un G318 Un G320 Un G322 CHO BPF Pass band edge frequency High Un G317 Un G319 Un G321 Un G323 Set the pass band edge frequency for the band pass filter for each channel For details on the digital filter refer to the following e Digital filter gt Page 80 Section 8 4 5 a Setting range For the setting range refer to the following e How to use the digital filters lt gt Page 82 Section 8 4 5 b b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is 0 All channels Point A channel where a value other than the above values is set brings about an error Error code 2320 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on 262 APPENDICES 39 CHO Attenuation band width Un G332 to Un G335 Set the attenuation band width the boundary between the attenuation band and stop band for each channel For details on the digital filter refer to t
87. setting request Y9 is turned on during logging the logging stops regardless of the ON OFF status of a hold trigger a request to stop logging All the logging data that have been stored before CHO Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on are cleared Check that CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 is ON 1 and set CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 to OFF 0 When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is set to OFF 0 before the logging stops the logging does not stop A level trigger is detected on the conversion cycle of the digital output value or the digital operation value Therefore the data when a hold trigger a request to stop logging is generated may not be stored in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 depending on the setting of the logging cycle To store the data when a hold trigger a request to stop logging is generated in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 arrange related settings so that the conversion cycle of the target value a trigger data and the logging cycle actual logging cycle have the same time period Stored value of a doite to be monitored 1 Logging cycle 1 1 Conversion Conversion i cycle cycle The data when a trigger is generated is not stored in a buffer memory area Trigger setting value A trigger is generated Ee ieee re ep gee get mea gt Data are collected Me SS ecties tece Settee gt Data are c
88. that have been stored before CHO Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on are cleared Check that CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 is ON 1 and set CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 to OFF 0 When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is set to OFF 0 before the logging stops the logging does not stop The following delay occurs at a maximum until the A D converter module receives a hold trigger a request to stop logging after CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is set to ON 1 Trigger delay Logging cycle Cycle at which logging is actually performed Scan time of the CPU module 1 Check on logging stop Check that CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 is ON 1 2 Checking logging data Refer to the following L3 Page 149 Section 8 13 2 3 152 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Resuming logging To resume logging set CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 to OFF 0 After logging resumes the value is stored from the head buffer memory area of the logging data storage area In addition OFF 0 is stored in CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 It may take time until ON 1 is stored in CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 after CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is set to ON 1 To resume logging check that ON 1 is stored in CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 and set CHO Logging hold request Un G10
89. time from when Trigger conversion request is turned on until when Trigger gt ee eee conversion completed flag is turned on gt Controlled by the program a ae 1 1 1 l l ION I ION I Trigger I i l conversion y l a l request OFF Ort i l I i I Waiting for AID Waiting for AID Waiting for CH1 CH3 A D f gt d tri er input conversion tri er input conversion tri er input conversion 199r Mpu i lgger Inpu i igger inpu i vol i 7 il I Waiting for AD Waiting for AD Waiting for CH2 CH4 A D f ii ee d tri er input conversion tri er input conversion tri er input conversion gger inpu igger inpu i igger inpu l 1 1 i l 1 l CH1 Digital operation value Un G54 0 Conversion value for Conversion value for CH3 Digital operation CH1 and CH3 first time CH1 and CH3 second time value Un G56 L a a l CH2 Digital operation l value Un G55 0 Conversion value for Conversion value for CH4 Digital operation I CH2 and CH4 first time I CH2 and CH4 second time value Un G57 j i i ION Trigger conversion Conversion completed fla completed 1 UnG 62 p Waiting for the OFF OFF completion 0 ow UL arte ai Ciearrequest i completed clear i request Un G163 No request 0 OFF OFF Point For the following con
90. transition in buffer memory 1st storage a 2nd storage b 3rd storage c 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 6 4 4 4 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 4 Time lag filter The A D converter module outputs digital output values with smoothed noise To use the time lag filter set the time lag filter for averaging processing and the time lag filter constant Time constant Sampling cycle x Time lag filter constant The A D converter module performs time lag filter processing using the time constant calculated by multiplying the set time lag filter constant by the sampling cycle The following are the relational expressions of time constants and digital output values Set CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Un G1 to Un G4 according to application n 1 Yn 0 n 2 Yn yn 1 yn yn 1 At TA n 3 Yn Yn 1 ta Yn 1 Att TA Yn Present digital output value yn Digital output value before smoothing Yn 1 Last digital output value yn 1 Last digital output value before smoothing n Number of sampling At Conversion time Sampling cycle TA Time constant 4 A D conversion completed flag XE turns on when n 2 Digital output value when the analog input value is changed from 0 to 1V The following figure shows the change of the digital output value with the input range of 0 to 10V and the time constant Sampling cycle x Time lag fi
91. with the on of the signal e Warning output signal X8 turns off when the change rate of the digital output values fall within the setting range for all the A D conversion enabled channels The ALM LED also turns off along with the off of the signal FERRNA gt Controlled by the A D converter module Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 1 Alert process alarm or Warning output flag 0 Normal x rate alarm 0 Normal Rate alarm Un G51 i Warning output OFF OFF signal X8 jeuBis jnduy 1 xipueddy sjeuBls O I JO slejeq xipueddy 233 234 3 Operating condition setting completed flag X9 When changing the following settings use Operating condition setting completed flag X9 as an interlock condition to turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 e A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Un G1 to Un G4 e Averaging process setting for the Q64AD Un G9 e Averaging process setting Un G24 Input signal error detection setting Un G27 Digital clipping enable disable setting Un G29 Warning output setting Un G48 Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 CHO Scaling lower limit value Un G62 Un G64 Un G66 Un G68 CHO Scaling upper limit value Un G63 Un G65 Un G67 Un G69 CHO Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 Un G90 Un G94 Un G98 CHO Process alar
92. write position for the next logging Stores the value of This logging load pointer Mov zo D40 J in Last logging load pointer ladder Initial processing LL LL LL LL L L LL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL 4 SM402 E i i 1 J LMOV KO D10 J Initializes Logging load points monitor value 1 1 i r J Initializes the write position of a save i i LDMOV KO D20 destination file register i 1 1 i DMOV K50000 D30 Sets the maximum number of stored points i for the save destination file register Ce ee J Sets the initial value to Last logging load MOV K 1 D40 4 pointer ladder LEI 00 D k FEND 5 5a ka 2 Interrupt processing das 160 p U3 g en lt gt G1224 D40 SET F10 zS a E ETE E A OEA EE EEE E IATE AEE ETE E E E ATP ie T EA E EAE 7 D 2 U3 U3 ae zi Fa Stores the logging data of This logging load fom G1224 D40 D gt D30 D20 J MOV G1216 ZO pees eee 5 pointer in an index register i U3 F 2 1 i Stores the value of Logging load points o 1 MOV G1232 D10 monitor value in a register 1 P zi 1 r q Stores the write position of the save ra i LDMOV D20 24 destination file register in the index register 5 3 1 1 1 4 The program in the dotted line is a common program 145 146 Device Description D10 Logging load points monitor value D20 The write position of the save destination file register D30 Maximum number of stored po
93. 0 12 630 47 00 Fax 48 0 12 630 47 01 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V 52 bld 3 Kosmodamianskaya nab 8 floor RU 115054 Moscow Phone 7 495 721 2070 Fax 7 495 721 2071 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Spanish Branch Carretera de Rub 76 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Barcelona Phone 902 131121 34 935653131 Fax 34 935891579 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V UK UK Branch Travellers Lane UK Hatfield Herts AL10 8XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 622 160 60 Fax 81 3 622 160 75 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION Inc 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 22 53 EUROPE FRANCE IRELAND ITALY POLAND RUSSIA SPAIN JAPAN USA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC GEVA AUSTRIA ALFATRADE Ltd MALTA T00 Kazpromavtomatika KAZAKHSTAN Wiener Stra e 89 99 Paola Hill Ul Zhambyla 28 AT 2500 Baden Malta Paola PLA 1702 KAZ 100017 Karaganda Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Phone 356 0 21 697 816 Phone 7 7212 50 1000 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 Fax 356 0 21 697 817 Fax 7 7212 5011 50 TECHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA Oktyabrskaya 19 Off 705 bld Traian 23 1 BY 220030 Mi
94. 0 to Un G44999 The difference between the buffer memory address where the latest data is stored and the start address in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 is stored For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function lt gt Page 130 Section 8 13 Ex When the value of CH2 Latest pointer Un G1099 is 8550 CH2 Logging data Un G15000 Un G23550 Oldest data Latest data gt Un G23551 23550 15000 8550 Un G24999 Poi oint CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1101 increases one by one each time data is stored from the beginning of logging When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is turned from ON 1 to OFF 0 CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1101 is cleared to 0 52 CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 The number of data stored in the logging data storage area can be checked during the logging For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 Point The number of logging data increases one by one each time data is stored from the beginning of logging When the value in the logging data storage area reaches 10000 CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 is fixed to 10000 since the value is overwritten from the start again When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is turned from ON 1 to OFF 0 CHO Number of
95. 001 X10100 10010X 10510 X12000 12100 X1 3250 13000X13310 X CHO Difference conversion Ne reference value 10000 X10000 X10000 X10000 X10000 X10000 10000 X 10000 je 13000 Un G180 to Un G183 X X X X Xt X X X Not updated CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 X 50 X 1 X 100 X 10 X 510 X 200 e oX 310 X CHO Diff i status ia alli Converting difference 1 Not converted 0 X Converting difference 1 Un G190 to Un G193 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS c Operation of the maximum value and the minimum value When the difference conversion starts the maximum value and the minimum value of the values acquired by the difference conversion are stored in CHO Maximum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 Un G36 and CHO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 Un G35 Un G37 By turning on Maximum value minimum value reset request YD the maximum value and the minimum value after the start of the difference conversion can be checked When Maximum value minimum value reset request YD is not turned on the maximum values and minimum values before and after difference conversion are mixed CHO Difference conversion R O trigger Un G172 to Un G175 _No request X Trigger request 1 Digital operation value X 9950 Xi 0001 10000X10210 X 1 0510 X12000 X12100X13250 X 9950 X10100 CHO Difference conversion reference value X 0 X 0 10000 1 0000X 10000 X 10000 X1 0000 X 1 0000 100001 0000 X Un G180 to Un G183
96. 056 to Un G1059 CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1085 CHO Loading interrupt enable disable setting Un G1200 to Un G1203 CHO Logging load points setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 For the timing of turning the signal on then off refer to the following Operating condition setting completed flag X9 gt Page 234 Appendix 1 1 3 2 APPENDICES User range write request YA a Offset gain setting mode Turn on then off User range write request YA to register values adjusted with the offset gain setting in the A D converter module The data is written to the flash memory when this signal is turned off then on For the timing of turning the signal on then off refer to the following e Offset gain setting mode flag XA gt Page 235 Appendix 1 1 4 b Normal mode 3 4 5 Turn on then off User range write request YA to restore the user range For the timing of turning the signal on then off refer to the following e Offset gain setting mode flag XA gt Page 235 Appendix 1 1 4 Channel change request YB Turn on then off Channel change request YB to change a channel to perform the offset gain setting For the timing of turning the signal on then off refer to the following e Channel change completed flag XB L gt Page 236 Appendix 1 1 5 Maximum value minimum value reset request YD Turn on then off Maximum value minim
97. 08 to Un G1011 to OFF 0 Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 OFFO IN QNU sa OFRO E 1 CHO Logging hold flag n i Un G1016 to Un G1019 OFF 0 i 1 Na 1S i 1 I F N Logging after P Logging status Logging Teee i Logging held Logging e Logging does not stop when OFF 0 is set to CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 before ON 1 is stored in CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 v 1 vt 1 1 1 1 i 1 Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program CHO Logging hold request oo X oo X o Un G1008 to Un G1011 OFE Ko ON OFF 0 _ z N Logging is ge not held OFF 0 CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 Logging after Logging status Logging x wager execulon X Logging s nb pjoy Bul6607 E1 98 uonouny Bulb607 1 g ee eae Cre eee a Buffer memory status when logging resumes The following table shows the buffer memory status when logging resumes Buffer memory Value status CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1101 CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1117 Values are initialized default value 0 e The values before logg
98. 0Hz to 1000Hz Sampling cycle 80us Sampling frequency 12 5Hz e Averaging process setting High pass filter e Pass band edge frequency 340Hz e Attenuation band width 200Hz The response time is 16 72ms Sampling cycle 80us x Filter degree 209 digit Input wave 0 100HZz 400Hz 1000Hz 0 Frequency that is Frequency that Frequency that Time attenuated passes through passes through digit Response timel 16 72ms Wave after digital filtering Time poy UOISIOAUOD A V Y8 87 88 Ex 3 When the band pass filter is used under the following conditions To input a SIN wave the frequency of analog inputs is changed from 100Hz to 400Hz and 400Hz to 1000Hz Sampling cycle 80us Sampling frequency 12 5Hz Averaging process setting Band pass filter Pass band edge frequency Low 320Hz Pass band edge frequency High 580Hz e Attenuation band width 200Hz The response time is 16 72ms Sampling cycle 80us x Filter degree 209 Input wave Wave after digital filtering digit 0 100Hz 400Hz 1000Hz 0 Frequency that is Frequency that Frequency that is Time attenuated passes through attenuated 1 digit t___Response time 16 72ms H EAEE EE leet as E Pipa epee eens y GERE L DN ee eee 1 p a majnem Se eee pl b p J 4 ER ded E ee a Se i ad aia cs aii ie ie ik v i E 0 Time CHAPTER 8
99. 0V ov 10V 32000 to 32000 312 5uV 4 0 to 10V OV 10V 0 to 32000 5 1 to 5V Extended mode 1V 5V 8000 to 32000 125uV User range setting X _ 4 32000 to 32000 200V Bi polar voltage 280 APPENDICES 4 Set the offset value and gain value in user range setting within the range satisfying the following conditions If the following conditions are not satisfied A D conversion may not be properly performed Setting range for offset value and gain value 10 to 10V gain value offset value gt 6 4V 2 When analog input exceeds the range of digital output value the digital output value is fixed to the maximum or minimum i Digital output value Input range setting Minimum Maximum 1 to 5V 768 0 to 5V 10 to 10V 32768 0 to 10V 768 32767 A 1 to 5V Extended mode 8768 User range setting 32768 Bi polar voltage 8 Maximum resolution in the user range setting Point Use the value within the practical analog input range and practical digital output range for each input range If a value is out of the range the resolution and accuracy may not fall within the range of performance specifications Do not use the value in the dotted line region in the graph of voltage input characteristic Do not input a value of 15V or more This may damage the elements UOISJIBAUOD C V JO ONSIWa OeIeUD UOISJEAUOD O xIPUeddy 281 4 Current
100. 0th data 2000 2001st data 10th time 8000 9000 9999 11th time 9000 0 999 9999 10000th data 12th time 0 1000 1999 uonouny Bui6607 48 uolouny uol e ap peo Bulb6o7 1 e198 141 5 Operation of the logging load detection function This function starts by setting interrupt pointers and turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 This function repeats its operation every time the same number of data as the logging load points monitor value is logged Ex The following figure shows the operation when the logging load detection function is used under the following conditions e A D conversion enabled channel 1CH e Logging load points setting value 1000 points e Interrupt Pointer Start No 60 e Interrupt Pointer Count 1 CH1 Logging enable disable setting coe Un G1000 _ 1 Enable 0 CH1 Loading interrupt enable Disable disable setting Un G1200 _ 1 Enable 0 Operating condition setting request Y9 OFF ON Operating condition setting completed flag X9 CH1 Logging load points monitor value Un G1232 1099 CH1 Latest pointer Un G1098 CH1 This logging load pointer Un G1216 CH1 Last logging load pointer Un G1224 CH1 Number of logging data Un G1106 0 ty 0 1 1000 Data Data Data are are are stored stored_ store Data Data i Data i During logging Logging status stopping are are st
101. 130 8 13 1 Logging load detection function 2 2 00 0 2 c cette eee 137 8 13 2 Stopping the logging operation 0 6 cece eee n neces 148 8 13 3 Logging hold request 00 e ence eee 152 8 13 4 Level tigger i hed wade apaa anaes tended Aelia ddd AA Beads a aaa ols 154 8 13 5 Logging outside trigger 0 0 cence nee e ene e eens 157 8 13 6 Setting method of a hold trigger a request to stop logging 00000 159 8 14 Trigger Conversion Function 00 00 ccc ee eee tenes 162 8 15 Error Logi FUNnCtON beac cir Solera ete hte iia bo A eee we Ok a ca 170 8 16 Module Error Collection Function 0 0 0 0 ect etna 173 8 17 Error Clear FUNCHION is oi ceca ii eei a ned Peed i ected ea edie bes 174 8 18 Saving and Restoring Offset gain Values 0 0 ccc cence nenee 175 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT gd Display Unitas Cantek St teh Ah cel el te bolts Bad Gl oe ae Mee cate ad ad A ch tet 181 9 27 Menuiransition a esencon e e e ae tal Sere wile dae wade A 182 9 3 List of Setting Value Change Windows 0 0000 cece cece eee eee 186 9 4 Checking and Clearing Errors 0 0 0 0 195 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING m 10 1 Procedure for Programming 0 0 000 c cc teens 197 10 2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration 00000e0ee 198 10 3 When an A D Converter Module Is Connected to a Head Module 000 207 12
102. 206 END error is detected J Turns on input signal error reset signal Outputs the error code in BCD Turns on Error clear request Turns off Error clear request CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 1 0 3 When an A D Converter Module Is Connected to a Head Module This section describes the system configuration of an A D converter module and a program example of the operation condition 1 System configuration The following figure shows an example of the system configuration when the A D converter module is mounted to a head module Power supply module Q62P Power supply module L61P CPU module Q10UDHCPU Head module LU72GF15 T2 Master local module QJ71GF11 T2 A D converter module L60AD4 2GH Input module QX10 Input module LX40C6 Output module QY10 Output module LY10R2 END cover L6EC X Y00 X Y20 X Y30 X Y1000 X Y1010 X Y1020 to to to to to to XIY1F XN2F XN3F X Y100F X Y101F X Y102F N o N S Master station Station No 0 Intelligent device station Station No 1 Ethernet cable 1000BASE T Network No 1 2 Programming condition This program reads digital output values enabled for A D conversion at CH1 to CH4 in the A D converter module CH3 deals with the digital operation value CH1 executes sampling processing CH2 executes averaging processing every 50 times CH3 converts analog values into digital values per 10 moving averages and CH4 converts analog valu
103. 296 Appendix 7 When Using GX Developer s an nsaan annara narena 297 Appendix 7 1 Operation of GX Developer 000 cc eee eee eee eens 297 Appendix 8 External Dimensions 2 2 02 00 000 e cette eee eens 300 INDEX 301 INSTRUCTION INDEX 303 REVISIONS 2222 ohne ie hoi Ree ead ed ee ee cael ae enone 304 WARRANTY cecek itiha en BRLa bebe a adhe ete heheh he rE iad akbee hb 305 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation is used for screen names and items 1 shows operating procedures W shows mouse operations 1 is used for items in the menu bar and the project window SHOWS setting OF operating examples OAJ shows reference manuals shows reference pages 7 1 1 Setting method eee 1 Setting parameters a Operating procedure i 1 Open th PLC Parameter ialog box Project window lt gt Parameter lt gt JPLC parameter Select the I O Assignment tab E ansen ier Tem Description Reference Tye Select the type ofthe connected module Page 74 Section 7 12 Model Name Select the model name ofthe connected module Page 74 Section 7 13 Fonts Set the numberof poms assigned o each si
104. 2p peo Bulb6o7 1 e198 140 3 Starting logging load detection function To use this function Set CHO Loading interrupt enable disable setting Un G1200 to Un G1203 to Enabled 0 and set CHO Logging load points setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 to the number of logging points that causes the interrupt This function starts when Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off a This logging load pointer Set a value whose integral multiple becomes 10000 in CHO Logging load points setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 The setting range is between 10 and 10000 When a value whose integral multiple does not become 10000 is set in CHO Logging load points setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 the number of the actual logging load points is forced to become a maximum value whose integral multiple is 10000 within the set value The value of the number of logging load points is stored in CHO Logging load points monitor value Un G1232 to Un G1235 The number of logging load points Logging load points monitor value 100 gt 100 90 gt 80 110 gt 100 650 gt 625 4000 gt 2500 4 Data checking method a This logging load pointer The head pointer read from CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 with the interrupt processing is stored in CHO This logging load pointer Un G1216 to Un G1219 e The default value of CHO This logging load pointer Un G1216 to Un G1219 is 1 e The v
105. 3 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO ee e E Me v i Data section Sign bit 1 Negative 0 Positive a Setting range The setting range is between 32768 and 32767 b Enabling the setting When the value is set the shifting amount to conversion value which was set turns valid regardless of turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 c Default value The default value is 0 All channels 26 Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 Set the setting value for the mode to be switched to p Setting value Mode to be switched to Un G158 Un G159 Normal mode 09644 41444 Offset gain setting mode 41444 09644 a Enabling the setting Turn on Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b After the mode is switched When the mode is switched this area is cleared to 0 and Operating condition setting completed flag X9 turns off After checking that Operating condition setting completed flag X9 is off turn off Operating condition setting request Y9 Point When a value out of the above setting range is written the mode is not switched and only the operating condition is changed 255 sessaippy Alowey Jeyng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 256 27 A D conversion timing monitor value Un G160 The value corresponding to the A D conversion timing set in Drive Mode Setting is stored For details on the trigger conversion function refer
106. 4 Un G36 Un G35 Un G37 71 72 1 Digital output values These are digital values after sampling processing or averaging processing has been performed 2 Digital operation values These are values obtained by operating the digital output value using the digital clipping function scaling function shift function or difference conversion function 3 Maximum and minimum values The maximum and minimum values of the digital operation values are stored Point If averaging processing time average count average is performed the digital values are stored on the averaging process cycle If the following processing is performed the digital values are stored on the sampling cycle e Sampling processing e Moving average Time lag filter e Low pass filter e High pass filter Band pass filter CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 A D Conversion Enable Disable Function Set whether to enable or disable A D conversion for each channel 1 Setting procedure Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable T Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name lt gt Parameter E ___ Item f CHI E Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion e enable disable setting 0 Enable X Averaging process setting Time Average Count uonouny ejqesiq a qeuy uoIsJeAUu0D G V 8 73 8 4 A D Conversion Method One of the following A D conversion methods ca
107. 40 1ppm C or lower Conversion speed 40u 2 channels Absolute maximum input Voltage 15V Current 30maA Offset gain setting count Up to 100000 counts Insulation method Between I O terminals and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between analog input channels dual channel transformer insulation Dielectric withstand voltage Between I O terminals and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between analog input channels 1000VAC for 1 minute Insulation resistance Between I O terminals and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10M Q or higher Number of occupied I O points 16 points I O assignment 16 points for intelligent Connected terminal 18 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 3 to 0 75mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 solderless terminals with sleeve are not usable Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 76A Weight 0 20kg 26 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Model Item L60AD4 2GH Input points 1 point Rated input voltage 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 Rated input current 6 0mA TYP at 24VDC ON voltage ON 13V or higher 3mA or higher current F OFF voltage OFF Outside trigger input aN 8V or lower 1 6mA or lower current Input resistance 3 9k Q OFF gt 40us Response ON time ON gt 40us OFF 4 2 3
108. 4AD 00004 R W 10 Ay A D conversion completed flag 0000 R 11 Bu CH1 Digital output value 0 R 12 Cy CH2 Digital output value 0 R 13 Dy CH3 Digital output value 0 R 14 Ey CH4 Digital output value 0 R 15 Fu to to System area 18 124 19 134 Latest error code 0 20 144 Setting range 00004 21 154 System area 22 16H Offset gain setting mode Offset specification 0000 R W 23 174 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification 0000 R W 24 184 Averaging process setting 00004 R W 25 194 System area 26 1Auy 27 1By Input signal error detection setting 0000 R W 28 1Cy System area 32 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Address Z F decimal hexadecimal Same Default Read Write 29 1DH Digital clipping enable disable setting OOOFy R W 30 1E CH1 Maximum value 0 R 31 1Fy CH1 Minimum value 0 R 32 204 CH2 Maximum value 0 R 33 214 CH2 Minimum value 0 R 34 224 CH3 Maximum value 0 R 35 234 CH3 Minimum value 0 R 36 244 CH4 Maximum value 0 R 37 254 CH4 Minimum value 0 R 38 264 to to System area 45 2Dy 46 2En Offset gain range specification 00004 R W 47 2Fy System area 7 z 48 304 Warning output setting OFOFy R W 49 314 Input signal error detection flag 00004 R 50 324 Warning output flag Process alarm 00004 R 51 33H Warning output flag Rate alarm 0000 R 52 344 Syste
109. 4H to Mode Wi MOV H964 G158 J Switching setting 1 U3 G158 rmov hatag Gis9 J Sets 4144H to Mode switching setting 2 U3 G159 r q Turns on Operating condition LSET v9 setting request Y39 Resets the operating condition setting request Y39 X39 i ve j r q Turns off Operating condition za LRST ve setting request Y39 X3A h Processing in normal mode n CF d Switching the mode by the intelligent function module switch setting Only the common program is required 68 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 8 Functions This chapter describes the functions of the A D converter module and the setting procedures for those functions For details on the I O signals and the buffer memory refer to the following e Details of I O Signals gt Page 232 Appendix 1 e Details of Buffer Memory Addresses lt gt Page 240 Appendix 2 8 1 Modes The A D conversion module has the normal mode and the offset gain setting mode Change the mode according to the function used The following describe each mode 1 Normal A D Converter Processing Mode The normal A D Converter Processing mode normally has External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal and Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory In this manual the description of normal mode indicates External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal and Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory a Normal
110. 60AD4 2GH Auto_Refresh Display All uoneinByuo5 wayshs puepuejs e ul jnpon eu Huis uayM Zol 203 c Writing parameter of intelligent function module Write the set parameter to the CPU module and reset the CPU module or power off then on the programmable controllers XZ Online gt Write to PLC d or Power OFF ON d Program example Read digital output values Reads A D conversion completed flag Reads CH1 Digital output value Reads CH2 Digital output value Reads CH3 Digital operation value Reads CH4 Digital output value 4 Reads Warning output flag Process alarm Processing when a warning occurs for CH2 Process alarm upper limit value Processing when a warning occurs for CH2 Process alarm lower limit value Read Warning output flag 4 Rate alarm Processing when a warning occurs for CH4 Rate alarm upper limit value Processing when a warning occurs for CH4 Rate alarm lower limit value Reads Input signal error detection flag Processing when CH1 Input signal X40 X30 X3E Y39 U3 1 VF Mov G10 K1MO MO AR mov 01 D11 M1 E LMOV D2 D12 M2 E MOV D28 D13 M3 e LMOV D4 D14 Process alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence X30 MOV D18 K2M20 M22 A P
111. 72 SH NA 081103ENG A 1302 MEE sfa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 ie NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPA When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V German Branch Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V org sl CZECH REP Czech Branch Avenir Business Park Radlick 714 113a 2 158 00 Praha 5 Phone 420 251551470 Fax 420 251 551 471 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V French Branch 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 0 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 0 1 55 68 57 57 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westgate Business Park Ballymount IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 4198800 Fax 353 0 1 4198890 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Italian Branch Viale Colleoni 7 20864 Agrate Brianza MB Phone 39 039 60 53 1 Fax 39 039 60 53 312 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Poland Branch Krakowska 50 PL 32 083 Balice Phone 48
112. 83 CHO Difference conversion status flag Not converted 0 Un G190 to Un G193 l No request 0 Trigger request 1 Digital value in approximately 2 2mA Converting difference 1 127 128 b Operation of when Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off during difference conversion During the difference conversion even when Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off the difference conversion continues without refreshing the difference conversion reference value To refresh the difference conversion reference value restart the difference conversion by changing CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 from Trigger request 1 to No request 0 then Trigger request 1 again CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 does not become valid even when the trigger changes from No request 0 to Trigger request 1 when Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned off then on After turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 change CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 from No request 0 to Trigger request 1 again ON Operating condition setting OFF request Y9 ON Operating condition setting completed flag X9 OFF CHO Difference conversion F trigger Un G172 to Un G175 Trigger request 1 No request 0 Trigger request 1 Digital operation value YX 9950 Xi 0
113. 9 36 ModuleA Error A2 19 33 Error C1 19 29 ModuleA Error A1 19 34 ModuleB Error B1 19 36 ModuleA Error A2 Example of screen display No Error Code Date and Time Model Name Start IJO A 10 7 J 00124 0070 2009 12 10 17 00 05 L6DAD4 0030 00123 0CE4 2009 12 10 17 00 04 L26CPU BT a 00122 o5DC 2009 12 10 16 15 50 L26CPU BT 00121 0070 2009 12 10 15 59 30 L60DA4 0030 00120 0070 2009 12 10 15 45 02 L60DA4 0010 oo 00119 OSDC 2009 12 10 14 14 38 L26CPU BT D 00118 0070 2009 12 10 14 12 03 L60DA4 0010 oO 00117 OCE4 2009 12 10 13 59 54 L26CPU BT 00116 OCE4 2009 12 10 13 35 11 L26CPU BT 00115 OSDC 2009 12 10 11 11 45 L26CPU BT a 00114 0070 2009 12 10 11 07 05 L60AD4 0010 c 00113 0CE4 2009 12 10 11 07 04 L26CPU BT D 00112 0070 2009 12 10 11 03 49 L60AD4 0010 m 00111 0CE4 2009 12 10 11 03 48 L26CPU BT 3 00110 OSDC 2009 12 09 16 30 58 L26CPU BT 3 00109 0070 2009 12 09 16 29 33 L60DA4 0010 Q 00108 0070 2009 12 09 16 29 12 L60DA4 0010 Q 00107 0838 2009 12 09 16 29 11 L26CPU BT v D aa 3 n c g 5 Point 2 o 5 For details on the module error collection function refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 173 8 1 T Error Clear Function This function clears the error from the system monitor when an error occurs By clicking the Error Clear button in the system monitor the l
114. ASS BAND 32767 0 6 BPF Pass band edge frequency Low Set the BPF Pass band edge frequency Low in the BPF PASS BAND L window BPF PASS BAND L window 1 Move the cursor using the q and gt buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the 4 and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items Input range Input item ae Input upper limit Input lower limit BPF PASS BAND L 32767 0 188 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT 7 BPF Pass band edge frequency High Set the BPF Pass band edge frequency High in the BPF PASS BAND H window BPF PASS BAND H window 1 Move the cursor using the lt and p buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items I Cr Input range nput item L Input upper limit Input lower limit BPF PASS BAND H 32767 0 8 Attenuate band width Set the attenuate band width in the ATTENUATE BAND window ATTENUATE BAND window 1 Move the cursor using the lt 4 and p gt buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items Input range Input item Input upper limit Input lower limit ATTENUATE BAND 32767 0 smopul eBBueyo anjen Huyjyes Jo IS 6 189 9 Process alarm setting Select
115. All channels Point A channel where a value other than the above values is set brings about an error Error code 2070 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on The logging continues When CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Disable 1 the setting for CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is ignored sessalppy Alowsy Jeyng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 265 42 CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 Hold stop status of logging can be checked with this flag For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 Hold stop status of logging Stored value OFF 0 ON 1 e Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 is turned to ON 1 when the status of logging changes to the hold stop from the status in which the logging is recording data in the logging data storage area e When the logging restarts by turning CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 from ON 1 to OFF 0 CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 is turned to OFF 0 43 CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1027 When the logging function is used set whether the logging data type is Digital output value or Digital operation value for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function lt Page 130 Section 8 13
116. B1y CH2 Loading interrupt enable disable setting 1 R W 1202 4B24 CH3 Loading interrupt enable disable setting 1 R W 40 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Address Z 7 decimal hexadecimal Name Default Read Write 1203 4B34 CH4 Loading interrupt enable disable setting 1 R W 1204 4B4 to to System area 1207 4B74 1208 4B8y CH1 Logging load points setting value 1000 R W 1209 4B94 CH2 Logging load points setting value 1000 R W 1210 4BAy CH3 Logging load points setting value 1000 R W 1211 4BBy CH4 Logging load points setting value 1000 R W 1212 4BCy to to System area 1215 4BFy 1216 4COy CH1 This logging load pointer 1 R 1217 4C14 CH2 This logging load pointer 1 R 1218 402 CH3 This logging load pointer 1 R 1219 403 CH4 This logging load pointer 1 R 1220 4C4y to to System area 1223 4C7Ty 1224 4C84 CH1 Last logging load pointer 1 R 1225 4C94 CH2 Last logging load pointer 1 R 1226 ACAY CH3 Last logging load pointer 1 R 1227 4CBy CH4 Last logging load pointer 1 R 1228 4CCy 2 to to System area a 1231 ACF p 1232 4D04 CH1 Logging load points monitor value 0 R a 1233 4D1y CH2 Logging load points monitor value 0 R 3 1234 4D2 CH3 Logging load points monitor value 0 R me 1235 4D3y CH4 Logging load points monitor value 0 R a 1236 4D4 to to System area 1799 7074 4 The default value is a value set af
117. CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G1071 are invalid The channel with the invalid setting fits in O A value fits in A indicates that the alarm status is as follows Correct the settings in CH1 Process alarm lower 640 2 Process alarm lower lower limit value gt Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH4 Process alarm upper limit value upper upper limit value Un G101 3 Process alarm lower upper limit value gt Process alarm upper lower limit value 4 Process alarm upper lower limit value gt Process alarm upper upper limit value T Set CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 to CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 to CH4 Rate alarm ue ae CH4 Rate alarm lower limit value Un G133 so that y lower limit value Un G133 are set as follows B 7001 Ean ERS they meet the following condition Rate alarm lower limit value gt Rate alarm upper limit value o E A Rate alarm lower limit value lt Rate alarm upper limit The channel where the error has occurred fits in O value The value set in CHO Rate alarm detection cycle setting value Set a value within the range of 1 to 32000 in CHO 7101 Un G118 to Un G121 is outside the range of 1 to 32000 Rate alarm detection cycle setting value Un G118 to The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Un G121 The value set in CHO Input signal error detection setting value Set a value within the range of 0 to 250 in CH
118. CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 3 Points for the use of the difference conversion function a Operation of when an input signal error occurs When an input signal error occurs even if CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 changes from No request 0 to Trigger request 1 the difference conversion does not start After the analog input value returns within the setting range change CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 from No request 0 to Trigger request 1 again If an input signal error occurs in the status of Trigger request 1 the difference conversion starts just when the analog input value returns within the setting value treating the digital operation value as the difference conversion reference value Detected Not detected Included Analog input value mA l DEN A A A A erg raae O Analog input value l l l 0 Dee Na ee ee eee N V a a a a g l i T 7 i a i 0 l Q 1 l l 2 ae een eRe I Input signal error is occurring a 0 Time S Timing when an analog T input value reached back T in th t Input signal error detection ON eE z 5 flag Un G49 OFF ON Input signal error detection signal XC OFF A D conversion L OFF completed flag Un G10 ON CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 CHO Difference conversion reference value Un G180 to Un G1
119. CRAS 2 Device Program Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment Buitin Ethernet port Built in 1 0 function setting 120 Assignment Slot Type Model name Points Stary o Switch setting 4 PLC Builtin 1 0 function v a oeo Detailed setting Assigning the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Jadojaneq X9 Jo uonesedO Z xipueddy Jadojersq X9 Bulsp u yM z xipueddy Item Description Type Select Intelli Model name Enter the model name of the A D converter module Points Select 16 point Start XY Enter a desired start I O number of the A D converter module 297 2 Intelligent function module switch setting Configure the setting from Switch setting in PLC parameter Parameter gt PLC parameter gt I O assignment gt Click the _ Switch setting button Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format HEX z Select HEX PLC Built in 1 0 function Intelli L6Q4D4 2GH Cancel Item Setting item Analog input range Input range setting 4 to 20mA Oy 0 to 20mA 1y 1 to 5V 2H Input range setting 0 to 5V 3H CH1 to CH4 10 to 10V 4H Switch 1 0
120. D turns on or flashes a When turning on Check item Action Is there any warning output Check Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 and Warning output flag Rate alarm Un G51 b When flashing Check item Action Is there any input signal error Check Input signal error detection flag Un G49 228 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 When a digital output value cannot be read Check item Action Is there any problem with wiring such as off or disconnection of analog signal lines Check the faulty area by checking signal line visually or conductively Is the CPU module in the STOP status Change the status of the CPU module to RUN Is the offset gain setting correct Check that the offset gain setting is correct When the user range setting is selected change the input range to the industrial shipment setting Then check that the A D conversion is executed If the A D conversion is properly executed configure the offset gain setting again Is the input range setting correct Check Setting range Un G20 When the input range setting is incorrect configure the intelligent function module switch setting again Is A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO set to be disabled for the channel to be used Check A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO Then enable A D conversion with the program or the parameter of the intelligent functi
121. EC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual 1 Number of the A D converter module s parameters The following number of parameters can be set in a single A D converter module Target module Initial setting Auto refresh setting L60AD4 2GH 11 57 2 Checking method The maximum number of the parameter settings and the number of the parameter settings set for an intelligent function module can be checked with the following operation XS Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt Intelligent Function Module Parameter List Intelligent Function Module Parameter List Intelligent Function Module Parameter Setting Status xY Address Module Name Initialization Count Auto Refresh Count A 0010 L604D4 2GH __ MlSetting Exist 57 Intelligent Function Module Parameter Setting Count Total Initial Auto Refresh 1 2 3 4 No Description 1 The total number of the parameters in the initial settings selected on the window 2 The maximum number of the parameter settings in the initial settings 3 The total number of the parameters in the auto refresh settings selected on the window 4 The maximum number of the parameter settings in the auto refresh settings CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 Function List The following table lists the functions of the A D converter module Item De
122. EE aves Rarace NE A Seta Sek ay NESS Gy 266 CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 40 264 CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 266 CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 roaa ao Wea bata dead me dof wae Dla alee Ald ahs 265 CHO Logging load points monitor value Un G1232 to Un G1235 0205 277 CHO Logging load points setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 2 0 276 CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 0 268 CHO LPF Pass band edge frequency Un G300 to Un G303 200 261 CHO Maximum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 UMG36 aut eae ated anak eee d a pate bes 247 CHO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 Un G35 WMG37 aa eke ae oe hie et oie 247 CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 EES geil pecan Reena E Bah nea E a seeege dah eae eee need a 273 CHO Present logging load pointer Un G1216 to Un G1219 0 277 CHO Previous logging load pointer Un G1224 to Un G1227 00004 277 CHO Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 Un G90 Un G94 Un G98 252 CHO Process alarm lower upper limit value Un G87 Un G91 Un G95 Un G99 252 CHO Process alarm upper lower limit value Un G88 Un G92 Un G96 Un G100 252 CHO Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G89 Un G93 Un G97 Un G101 252 CHO Rate alarm detection cycle setting value
123. Error code 900 or 910 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on Change the setting value since 0 is set as the default value When Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 is set to Disabled 1 the settings for CHO Scaling lower limit value Un G62 Un G64 Un G66 Un G68 and CHO Scaling upper limit value Un G63 Un G65 Un G67 Un G69 are ignored sessalppy Alowey Jeyng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 251 21 CHO Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 Un G90 Un G94 Un G98 CHO Process alarm lower upper limit value Un G87 Un G91 Un G95 Un G99 CHO Process alarm upper lower limit value Un G88 Un G92 Un G96 Un G100 CHO Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G89 Un G93 Un G97 Un G101 Set the range of the digital operation value for each channel For details on the process alarm refer to the following e Process alarm gt Page 102 Section 8 8 1 a Setting range e The setting range is between 32768 and 32767 e Configure the four step setting of process alarm upper upper limit value process alarm upper lower limit value process alarm lower upper limit value and process alarm lower lower limit value b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is 0 All channels Point When a value out of the setting range above or a value
124. F 20000050 239 Error flag XP 3 aac oa tere A See a ees ea 237 Error history No 1 Un G1810 to Un G1969 278 Error log function 000000 eee 170 External wiring 2000000 eee eee 53 G Gain value 0 i a oa ia SRE aia 279 H Hardware LED information 231 Hardware switch information 231 High pass filter high frequency pass filter 81 l VO assignment 20000 0c eee eee 297 Input range extended mode function 94 Input signal error detection flag Un G49 248 Input signal error detection function 96 Input signal error detection setting Un G27 246 Input signal error detection signal XC 236 Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 256 Intelligent function module switch setting 298 L Latest address of error history Un G1800 278 Latest error code Un G19 242 Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 271 Fevelitrigger a 4 4 seca teehee Poe ek aE 154 Logging function 200000000 130 Logging hold request 200005 152 Logging load detection function 137 Logging outside trigger 00 157 Low pass filter low frequency pass filter 81 Lower limit detection 2200050 97 Lower upper limit detection 97 M Maximum and minimum values 72 Maximum value minimum value hol
125. F turns on then the ERR LED turns on 109 wee oey 7 3 8 uonouny jndjno Bulweny g8 8 9 Scaling Function This function enables scale conversion on the output digital values The values are converted within the range of the set scaling upper limit value and scaling lower limit value The converted values are stored in CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 1 Concept of scaling setting Ex When the input range is set to 10 to 10V For the scaling lower limit value set a value corresponding to the lower limit of the input range 32000 and for the scaling upper limit value set a value corresponding to the upper limit of the input range 32000 2 Calculation of the digital operation value For A D conversion use the values produced by the following formulas Values after the decimal point are omitted during scale conversion e Voltage 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 1 to 5V user range setting bi polar voltage 1 to 5V Extended mode e Current 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA user range setting uni polar current 4 to 20mA Extended mode pee Dx x SH SL Digital operation value SL 32000 e Voltage 10 to 10V Dx x SH SL SH SL Digital operation value 64000 2 Item Description Dx Digital output value SH Scaling upper limit value SL Scaling lower limit value 4 Although the digital output value range in the extended mode is 8000 to 32000 this function scales
126. G1072 to Un G1081 This area stores the data to be monitored when the level trigger of the logging function is used Ten types of data are available Level data 0 Un G1072 to Level data 9 Un G1081 Use Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 to monitor device values in other than the A D converter module and generate triggers For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 a Application example To monitor the data register D100 in the CPU module and operate the level trigger in CH1 create a program as follows 1 Set CH1 Trigger data Un G1064 to 1073 Level data 1 When Level data 1 is used 2 Store the storage data D100 in Level data 1 Un G1073 by the program continuously The start I O number is set to 10 in the following program example X10 Y19 X19 U1 MOV D100 G1073 b Setting range The setting range is between 32768 and 32767 c Default value The default value is 0 for all channels 49 CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1085 When the logging function is used set a level where a level trigger is generated for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 a Setting range The setting range is between 32768 and 32767 b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Defau
127. HO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 Un G35 Un G37 are updated with the current value When turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 changes the setting e When Maximum value minimum value reset request YD is turned on then off Point For the channel to which the averaging processing is specified the maximum and minimum values are stored at averaging processing time intervals When the following functions are used the values calculated by each function are stored in CHO Maximum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 Un G36 and CHO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 Un G35 Un G37 e Digital clipping function Scaling function e Shift function Difference conversion function 13 Offset gain range specification Un G46 The input range can be changed in the offset gain setting Set uni polar current OOOE or bi polar voltage OOOF p as the user range Input range Setting value Uni polar current OOOE Bi polar voltage OOOF a Enabling the setting When Channel change request YB is turned on then off the setting of the input range is enabled b Default value The default value is 0000p Point When a value out of the setting range above is set an error occurs The error code 171 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on 247 sessalppy Alowe eying jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 14 Warning output setting Un G48
128. INGS 7 2 Switch Setting Set the input range operation mode and A D conversion timing used in each channel 1 Setting procedure Open the Switch Setting window Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0010 L60AD4 2GH Input Range Setting 4 to 20mA 4 to 20mA4 4 to 20mA 4 to 20mA Drive Mode Setting Normal A D Converter Processing Mode AJD Conversion Timing 7 Normal Internal Scan x This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC Parameter contains an out of range value ma N ie Item Description Setting value gZ 4 to 20mA default value g 0 to 20mA a 1 to 5V 0 to 5V Set the input range used in each 10 to 10V Input Range Settin pu 9 ve channel 0 to 10V 4 to 20mA Extended Mode 1 to 5V Extended Mode e User Range Setting Unipolar Current e User Range Setting Bipolar Voltage Set the operation mode of the A D Normal A D Converter Processing Mode default value Drive Mode Setting A converter module Offset Gain Setting Mode e Normal Internal Scan default value External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory Set the timing of the A D A D Conversion Timing conversion
129. LC Parameter Select Project from the view selection area to open the Project window In the Project window expand Parameter and select PLC Parameter View selection area The chapter of the current page is shown The section of the current page is shown Point Pshows notes that requires attention Remark shows useful information HE MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Unset Project PRG MAIN i Project Edit Find Replace Compile Pes S BB or dt i Navigation Parameter Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment Program Setting S POU E Program a MAIN Q Local Device Comment E Device Memory Device Initial Value rs i L4 User Library Connection Destination View Online Debug Diagno Unlabeled 13 Pages describing instructions are organized as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation Instruction name 6 4 2 Disconnecting a connection SP SOCCLOSE Execution condition of the instruction Command SP SOCCLOSE f sesoociose uo 6 amp Structure of the instruction in the ladder mode Internal device Joo Consta O shows the devices aale A omer eae lew cea cane applicable to the in
130. MITSUBISHI Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSECL MELSEC L Dual Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual L60AD4 2GH MODEL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels A WARNING and A CAUTION A WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions N CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under N CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING Do not write any data to the system area and write protect area R of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module A
131. O soo Un G142 to Un G145 is outside the range of 0 to 250 Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O to Un G145 Set one of the following values in Input signal error detection setting Un G27 for the channel where the error has occurred The value set in Input signal error detection setting Un G27 is Disabl ip e Disable 3101 outside the range of 0 to 4 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O e Upper lower limit detection 1 e Lower limit detection 2 e Upper limit detection 3 e Disconnection detection 4 222 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Hae i Description and cause of error Action decimal To perform disconnection detection using the input f signal error detection function set the input range A value set in Input signal error detection setting Un G27 is k j of the corresponding channel to 4 to 20mA Disconnection detection 4 besides the set input range for the f Extended mode or 1 to 5V Extended mode 7 same channel is other than the following i i 8201 Not to perform disconnection detection using the 4 to 20mA Extended mode input signal error detection function set Input 1 to 5V Extended mode f j 7 signal error detection setting Un G27 of the The channel where the error has occurred fits in O f corresponding channel to the
132. O number X Y described above shows the case that the start I O number of the A D converter module is set to 0 Do not use the Use prohibited signals shown above because the system uses them If users use turn on the signals the functions of the A D converter module cannot be guaranteed 31 4817 JeuBls O I v e 3 5 List of Buffer Memory Addresses The following table lists the buffer memory addresses of the A D converter module For details on the buffer memory addresses refer to the following e Details of Buffer Memory Addresses gt Page 240 Appendix 2 Point Do not write data to the system area and the area where the data cannot be written from the program in the buffer memory Writing data to these areas may lead the module to malfunction 1 Un GO to Un G1799 Address Address 4 4 2 Name Default Read Write decimal hexadecimal 0 On A D conversion enable disable setting 0000 R W CH1 Time Average Count Average 1 1H i 0 R W Moving Average Time lag filter constant CH2 Time Average Count Average 2 24 RA N 0 R W Moving Average Time lag filter constant CH3 Time Average Count Average 3 3H 0 R W Moving Average Time lag filter constant CH4 Time Average Count Average 4 44 0 R W Moving Average Time lag filter constant 5 5H to to System area 8 8H 9 9H Averaging process setting for Q6
133. SOCCLOSE instruction and tums off in the next END processing Completion device 1 Tums on or off according to the result of the SP SOCCLOSE instruction Description Remains off Tums on in the END processing of a scan after completion of the SP SOCCLOSE instruction and tums off in the next END processing A detection of an operation error tums on the Error fiag SMO and a corresponding error code is stored in SDO when The connection number specified for is other than 1 to 16 Error code 4101 The device numbers specified for and exceed the device point range Error code 4101 An invalid device is specified Error code 4004 Program example When M2000 is tumed on or when the connected device disconnects connection No 1 connection No 1 is disconnected by the following program Device used Open completion signal Open request signal SPSOCCLOSE instruction control data SPSOCCLOSE instruction completion device Promceng ter dacoremcton of Comecon Na Toy ne argat Comason Na Telos Seting SPSOCCLOSE ocacuteg fag me E Hi Noma camsiaten ror completion Fesatng SPSODCLOSE perita e Instructions can be executed under the following conditions On the risin On the fallin Execution condition Any time During on ewe During off mE edge edge Symbol No symbol TUL fto LI e The following device
134. Sampling Count average Moving average Primary delay filter Vi i i unt av vi Vi i i ging p g processing g g g ry y Time Average Count Average f 0 50 times 10 times 100 times Moving Average Time lag filter constant Warning output setting Disable Enable Disable Disable Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 20000 0 0 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 18000 0 0 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 3000 0 0 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 0 0 0 Rate alarm output setting Disable Disable Disable Enable Rate alarm detection cycle setting value 0 0 0 320 times Rate alarm upper limit value 0 0 0 20 0 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 0 0 20 0 Upper and Lower F Input signal error detection setting Disable Disable Disable Detection Input signal error detection setting value 10 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 Scaling enable disable setting Disable Disable Enable Disable Scaling upper limit value 0 0 32000 0 Scaling lower limit value 0 0 0 0 Digital clipping function enable f Disable Disable Enable Disable disable setting Shifting amount to conversion value 0 0 10000 0 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING b Device for user Device Description D1 D11 CH1 Digital output value D2 D12 CH2 Digital output value D4 D14 CH4 Digital output value D8 Input signal error detection flag D10 Error code D18 Warning output flag Process alarm D19 Warni
135. Series GX Works2 64 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 7 5 2 Setting from a program 1 Setting procedure The following describes the procedures when setting the offset gain from a program Start Switch to the offset gain setting mode Confirm that the module is in the Offset gain range setting mode by checking that the RUN LED is flashing Set Uni polar current OOOEx or Bi polar voltage OOOFx to Offset gain range specification Un G46 bd Turn on Channel change request YB y 7 Check that Channel change completed flag XB is on Apply the voltage or current equivalent to the offset value to be set Set the channel to adjust the offset to Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 More than one channel can be set simultaneously Note that Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 must be set as 0 though Yy Turn off Channel change request YB Is it required to adjust other channels Turn on Channel change request YB Y Check that Channel change completed Register the offset gain setting to the flag XB is on A D converter module by turning on User range write request YA Bum s uleBjesyo G y Check that Offset gain setting mode Turn off Channel change request YB flag XA is off d then oe User range write request YA y Apply the voltage or current
136. T SIG VALUE 250 0 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT 12 Scaling setting Select DISABLE or ENABLE in the SCALING window SCALING window 1 Use the A and Y buttons to select DISABLE or ENABLE and confirm with the button When ENABLE is selected follow the rest of the procedure t SCALE UP LIMIT window 2 Move the cursor using the 4 and p buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button 4 SCALE LOW LIMIT window 3 Move the cursor using the lt 4 and p gt buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and Y buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items ai Input range nput item p Input upper limit Input lower limit SCALE UP LIMIT 32000 32000 SCALE LOW LIMIT 13 Shifting amount to conversion value Set the shifting amount to conversion value in the SHIFT window SHIFT window 1 Move the cursor using the q and p buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items Input range Input item E P Input upper limit Input lower limit SHIFT 32767 32768 Point SHIFT is reflected to the digital output value regardless of turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 However when SHIFT is set in a display unit
137. U3 G29 U3 G152 Y39 M100 Y39 1 Enables A D conversion for CH1 to CH4 Sets CH2 Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Sets CH3 Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant J Sets CH4 Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Sets CH1 to CH4 Averaging process setting gt Sets CH2 and CH4 Warning output setting Sets CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit value Lem Sets CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit value pem Sets CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value e Sets CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit value e Sets CH4 Rate alarm detection cycle setting value e J Sets CH4 Rate alarm upper limit value J Sets CH4 Rate alarm lower limit value Activates CH1 Input signal error detection Sets CH1 Input signal error detection value i Sets CH3 Scaling setting Sets CH3 Scaling lower limit value Sets CH3 scaling upper limit value J Enables CH3 digital clipping function Sets CH3 shifting amount to conversion value Turns on Operating condition setting request Turns off Operating condition setting request 205 uonesnByuo0y wa3s S puepuels e ul ajnpon 2y BuisN usu ZOL Read digital output values X30 M22 X40 X30 X3E Y39 U3 KS Rp ov G10 K1MO MO E U3 MOV G11 D11 M1 E U3 MOV G12 D12 M2 E U3
138. Un G1810 to Un G1819 The overwritten history is deleted The stored error history is cleared when the module is powered off or when the CPU module is reset 172 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 1 6 Module Error Collection Function This function collects errors and alarms that occurred in the A D converter module and stores them to the CPU module By holding the module errors in a memory that can hold data in the event of power failure the details on errors can be held even after the module is powered off or reset Error history CPU module including built in I O and built in CC Link and error log intelligent function module are displayed on one screen Errors that occurred in the entire system can be monitored in reverse chronological order Module A Module B Va CPU 2119 29 Error A1 occurred 49 34 Error B4 occurred 19 33 Error C1 occurred 4 77119 36 Error A2 occurred W 1 ay e L el 1 a o ol aj ew i a P Programming tool H 1 Tm Error history display I x Time Module in error Error code H 19 29 i Module A i Error A1 i Error history k1 19 33 i CPU Error C1 CPU module k Module error log 19 34 ModuleB Error B1 Time Module in error Error code 1
139. When ENABLE is selected follow the rest of the procedure 4 RATE ALARM TIME window 2 Move the cursor using the 4 and p buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button 4 RATE ALARM UPR window 3 Move the cursor using the lt 4 and gt buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and Y buttons respectively Confirm with the button 4 RATE ALARM LWR window 4 Move the cursor using the 4 and p buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items smopuIM eBueyo anjen Buijes Jo 4S7 6 Input range Input item Ey a Input upper limit Input lower limit RATE ALARM TIME 32000 1 RATE ALARM UPR 32767 32768 RATE ALARM LWR 191 192 11 Input signal error detection setting Select a detection method in the INPUT SIG ERR window 1 Use the A and buttons to select the detection TAPU ale ERRE Window method from the following and confirm with the button DISABLE e LWR e UPR e DISCONNECT L INPUT SIG VALUE window 2 Move the cursor using the lt and p buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items Input range Input item TO Input upper limit Input lower limit INPU
140. Yalue Logging cycle unit specification 1 Digital Operation Value 5 Set the cycle of storing logging data to Logging cycle setting value I Logging cycle setting value 1000 ms 6 Select the unit of Logging cycle setting value in Logging cycle unit specification Ey By Ww a togging cycle unit 1 ms Ba Cc io Logging points after trigger e Q Hold trigger condition setting S 2 Trigger data am R O 5 7 Set Loading interrupt enable disable setting to 0 Enable 23 259 Loading interrupt i z enable disable setting TEN Q Logging load points setting value PASSE 2 T a 8 Set the number of logging points that cause a load interrupt in Logging load points setting value Logging load points setting value 1000 7 Precautions for the use of the logging load detection function To generate logging load pointer detection interrupts set the logging load detection function and create an interrupt program under the following precautions The sequence scan time becomes longer because of the processing time of the interrupt program set to interrupt pointers When the logging load detection function is used consider the interrupt program set to interrupt pointers 143 Ex When the following are set in the program with the sequence scan time of 10ms Logging cycle 40us Logging load points 10 Processing time for the interrupt program 100us When the logging load detection function is used The interrupt program 100us
141. a 9001 to 10000th data Logging of the converted data A Target data After low pass filter After band pass filter After high pass filter Using the digital filtering function the target data are processed preferred data CHAPTER 1 A D CONVERSION MODULE 1 2 0 Other features 1 Detailed control by high resolution In all analog input ranges the high resolution of 1 32000 is achieved 2 Reliability by high accuracy The accuracy for the maximum value of the digital output value is 0 05 reference accuracy 3 Dual channel isolation Four channels are divided into two groups of two and the two groups are isolated from each other This prevents the effects of noise from other channels and the measurement becomes more stable A D converter module Sensor V AID CH1 I conversion V I c V i r AID Dual channel isolation CH2 l conversion Isolate between CH1 CH2 and CH3 CH4 to prevent the effects of noise s AID O CH3 I conversion Ja V ib ae Qa V 2c A D 2 a PH nn sf V ll Si g oO 4 o 4 Operation of a digital output value by each function The digital clipping function scaling function shift f
142. ae aia gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program ON Module READY X0 ON Offset gain setting mode flag XA OFF U 7 OFF A y ON 7 z OFF OFF User range write request YA 235 5 Channel change completed flag XB 236 When changing a channel to perform the offset gain setting use Channel change completed flag XB as an interlock condition to turn on then off Channel change request YB For the offset gain setting refer to the following e Offset gain Setting L gt Page 62 Section 7 5 SEES gt Controlled by the A D converter module Controlled by the program Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 ee lt Gain specification Un G23 ON Channel change completed OFF an a OFF flag XB ON be 7 7 OFF OFF Channel change request YB 6 Input signal error detection signal XC Input signal error detection signal XC turns on when an analog input value exceeds the range set with CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G145 in any channel which has been A D conversion enabled after the detection condition is set in Input signal error detection setting Un G27 When a disconnection is detected the signal ignores the setting for CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G145 and turns on at the disconnection detection
143. ag Un G162 does not change 258 APPENDICES 31 CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 Use this buffer memory area as a trigger to start or stop the difference conversion for each channel For details on the difference conversion function refer to the following e Difference Conversion Function gt Page 126 Section 8 12 Difference conversion trigger Setting value No request 0 Trigger request 1 a Starting Stopping the difference conversion e When the setting value is turned from No request 0 to Trigger request 1 the difference conversion starts e When the setting value is turned from Trigger request 1 to No request 0 the difference conversion stops b Default value The default value is No request 0 All channels Point A channel where a value other than the above values is set brings about an error Error code 370 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on The difference conversion continues 32 CHO Difference conversion reference value Un G180 to Un G183 This area stores the digital operation value at the start of the difference conversion as the difference conversion reference value For details on the difference conversion function refer to the following e Difference Conversion Function gt Page 126 Section 8 12 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO eE Tee Se ee v D
144. al operation value 2 0 16000 6 8000 8000 10 16000 0 14 24000 8000 18 32000 16000 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 1 0 Shift Function This function adds shifts a set shifting amount to conversion value to the digital output value and stores the result in the buffer memory The digital operation value reflects the change in the shifting amount to conversion value on a real time basis Therefore fine adjustment can be easily performed when the system starts 1 CHO Digital output value 39000 kasesseh Ssenh sseacuees Cian to UniG14 2 Digital operation value 319090 os4osessecsereecee fee i after adjustment CHO Shifting amount to 710 eae conversion value 2 i Un G150 to Un G153 OS 1 Digital output value i before adjustment 2 CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 0 gt 5 Analog input voltage V 10 V Input voltage CHO Digital output value Input voltage CHO Digital operation value V Un G11 to Un G14 V Un G54 to Un G57 0 10 gt 0 0 5 31990 5 32000 1 Operation of the shift function A set shifting amount to conversion value is added to the digital operation value The digital operation value with shift addition is stored in CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 The shift amount is added in every sampling cycle for sampling processing and is added in every averaging process cycle for averaging processing Then those added values are st
145. alue L 0 R W 223 DFy CH2 User range setting offset value H 0 R W 224 E0y CH2 User range setting gain value L 0 R W 225 E1y CH2 User range setting gain value H 0 R W 226 E24 CH3 User range setting offset value L 0 R W 227 E34 CH3 User range setting offset value H 0 R W 228 E4y CH3 User range setting gain value L 0 R W 229 E5y CH3 User range setting gain value H 0 R W 230 E6y CH4 User range setting offset value L 0 R W 231 E7y CH4 User range setting offset value H 0 R W 232 E84 CH4 User range setting gain value L 0 R W 233 E94 CH4 User range setting gain value H 0 R W 234 EAu to to System area z 299 12B4 300 12Cy CH1 LPF Pass band edge frequency 0 R W 301 12D CH2 LPF Pass band edge frequency 0 R W 302 12Ey CH3 LPF Pass band edge frequency 0 R W 303 12Fy CH4 LPF Pass band edge frequency 0 R W 304 1304 to to System area 307 1334 308 1344 CH1 HPF Pass band edge frequency 0 R W 309 135 CH2 HPF Pass band edge frequency 0 R W 310 1364 CH3 HPF Pass band edge frequency 0 R W 311 1374 CH4 HPF Pass band edge frequency 0 R W 312 1384 to to System area 315 13By 36 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Address F decimal hexadecimal Rape Default Read Write 316 13Cy CH1 BPF Pass band edge frequency Low 0 R W 317 13Dy CH1 BPF Pass band edge frequency High 0 R W 318 13Ey CH2 BPF P
146. alue stored in CHO This logging load pointer Un G1216 to Un G1219 is calculated by the following formula and stored every time the same number of data as the value stored in CHO Logging load points monitor value Un G1232 to Un G1235 is logged This logging load pointer Latest pointer Logging load points monitor value 1 4 Indicates the address where the latest data is stored in the logging data storage area CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b Last logging load pointer e This logging load pointer of when the previous pointer detection interrupt occurs is stored in CHO Last logging load pointer Un G1224 to Un G1227 The default value of CHO Last logging load pointer Un G1224 to Un G1227 is 1 CHO Last logging load pointer Un G1224 to Un G1227 is used to detect the overlap of the detection interrupt processing of the logging load pointer gt Page 143 Section 8 13 7 lex The values stored in each pointer at every detection interrupt of the load pointer when the logging load detection starts with CHO Logging load points setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 being set to 1000 Load pointer i 3 j Last logging This logging Relative address Buffer memory detection Latest pointer load pointer load pointer interrupt 0 1st data Initial value 1 1 0 1st time 1 0 999 999 1000th data 2nd time 0 1000 1999 1000 1001st data 3rd time 1000 2000 2999 lt 1999 200
147. an error may occur on the CPU module side 138 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 1 Setthe interrupt pointers of the CPU module to SI No 0 to No 3 Ex When the logging load pointer detection interrupts SIO to SI3 are assigned to the interrupt pointers 160 and later of the CPU module Project window 2 gt Parameter gt gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System gt 1 button Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting PLC Side Interrupt Pointer Interrupt Pointer Start No Count 60 4 Intel Module Side ligent it Check Cancel Point To use only specific SI No choose one of the following methods Using Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting in the PLC parameter The same number of interrupt causes as that of pointers counted from the head SI No is used with Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting For example when the head SI No is set to 1 and the pointer count is set to 2 only S11 and SI2 are used Using IMASK instruction of the program With the IMASK instruction setting whether to enable or disable interrupt mask the interrupt program for each interrupt pointer number is possible For details on the interrupt programs refer to the following J IMELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 139 uonouny Bui6607 48 uolouny uoi28
148. and a stop band pass band edge frequency attenuation band width An attenuation characteristic is composed of the attenuation band and the attenuation rate 53 dB shown with the pass band edge frequency and the pass band edge frequency the attenuation band width Ex The following figure shows the attenuation characteristic the attenuation band and attenuation rate when the low pass filter is used dB 0 EE oie cane ee ees o Stop band amp Pass band Attenuation band S c g lt Attenuation band width 53 0 Pass band edge Pass band edge frequency f Hz frequency Attenuation band width CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Response time Response time is the time taken to obtain an attenuation rate 53 dB after filter processing is started The following figure shows response time Ex The output waveform obtained after an input SIN wave passed through a digital filter Amplitude Input wave o f i4 f 4 4 4 H 4 Wave after digital filter l l l l Amplitude 0 ms l l l 0 ms Response time Start filter Timing where the attenuation processing characteristic is reached Response time is obtained from the following calculation Response time Sampling cycle x Filter degree A A filter degree is a value that the system internally derives from a pass band edge frequency and a conversion frequency of the A D converter modul
149. anges to be used for saving and restoring offset gain values a Reference table for CH1 Industrial shipment setting offset value L Un G202 to CH4 Industrial shipment setting gain value H Un G217 The reference values vary depending on the setting of Pass data classification setting Un G200 voltage or current Address decimal Pass data are DARA Reference value Description classification CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 hexadecimal setting 202 206 210 214 Voltage Approx 000000004 Industrial shipment setting offset value 203 207 211 215 Current Approx 00000000 204 208 212 216 Voltage Approx 0000C51E Industrial shipment setting gain value 205 209 213 217 Current Approx 0000C51E b Reference table for CH1 User range setting offset value L Un G218 to CH4 User range setting gain value H Un G233 Offset gain value Reference value hexadecimal OV Approx 000000004 1V Approx 000013B6 Voltage 5V Approx 0000628F 10V Approx 0000C51E OmA Approx 000000004 Current 4mA 1 Approx 0000276C4 20mA Approx 0000C51E This value is stored in User range setting offset value by default 2 This value is stored in User range setting gain value by default 180 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT This chapter describes the functions of the display unit that can be used with the A D converter module For instruc
150. annel with an input range of 0 to 5V e Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e Scaling upper limit value 16000 e Scaling lower limit value 4000 Scaling enable disable setting O Enable Scaling upper limit value 16000 Scaling lower limit value 4000 teeereeeereee The following figure and table show the digital output values and digital operation values Digital output value Scaing upper limit value 16000 82000 iiss A Analog input voltage V Gi PATON eae eee scaing lower limit value 4000 0 A Analog input voltage V Digital output value Digital operation value 0 0 4000 1 6400 6400 2 12800 8800 3 19200 11200 4 25600 13600 5 32000 16000 112 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 2 When the following values are set for a channel with an input range of 10 to 10V e Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e Scaling upper limit value 16000 Scaling lower limit value 4000 Scaling enable disable setting O Enable Scaling upper limit value 16000 Scaling lower limit value 4000 The following figure and table show the digital output values and digital operation values Digital output value scaing upper limit value 16000 732000 bssseedteobeeseceesS scaling lower limit value 4000 32000 4 i Analog input voltage V Analog input voltage V Digital output value Digital operation value 10 32000 4000
151. ass band edge frequency Low 0 R W 319 13Fy CH2 BPF Pass band edge frequency High 0 R W 320 1404 CH3 BPF Pass band edge frequency Low 0 R W 321 1414 CH3 BPF Pass band edge frequency High 0 R W 322 1424 CH4 BPF Pass band edge frequency Low 0 R W 323 1434H CH4 BPF Pass band edge frequency High 0 R W 324 1444 to to System area 331 14By 332 14Ch CH1 Attenuation band width 0 R W 333 14D CH2 Attenuation band width 0 R W 334 14E CH3 Attenuation band width 0 R W 335 14Fy CH4 Attenuation band width 0 R W 336 1504 to to System area 999 3E7y 1000 3E8y CH1 Logging enable disable setting 1 R W 1001 3E9y CH2 Logging enable disable setting 1 R W 1002 SEAy CH3 Logging enable disable setting 1 R W 1003 3EBy CH4 Logging enable disable setting 1 R W w 1004 3ECy 2 to to System area a 1007 SEFy 3 1008 3F0u CH1 Logging hold request 0 R W a 1009 3F1y CH2 Logging hold request 0 R W 3 1010 3F2y CH3 Logging hold request 0 R W me 1011 3F3y CH4 Logging hold request 0 R W a 1012 3F4y to to System area 1015 3F7y 1016 3F8y CH1 Logging hold flag 0 R 1017 3F9H CH2 Logging hold flag 0 R 1018 3FAyY CH3 Logging hold flag 0 R 1019 3FBuy CH4 Logging hold flag 0 R 1020 3FCy to to System area 1023 SFFy 1024 400 CH1 Logging data setting 1 R W 1025 4014 CH2 Logging data setting 1 R W 1026 4024 CH3 Logging data setting 1 R W 1027 4034 CH4 Logging data setting 1 R W 37
152. atest error code stored in Latest error code Un G19 is cleared and the ERR LED turns off The operation is the same as that for Error clear request YF and clearing the error from the display unit However the error history cannot be cleared with the button For instructions on Error clear request YF and clearing the error from the display unit refer to the following e Error clear request YF gt Page 239 Appendix 1 4 e Checking and Clearing Errors C gt Page 195 Section 9 4 SX Diagnostics lt gt System Monitor gt Error Module Module s Detailed Information Monitoring A ti Status m Module Model Name I O Address Mount Position Product Information Production Number L60AD4 2GH 030 Main Block Slot 0 141010000000000 4 f m Module Information Module Access Status of External Power Supply Fuse Blown Status Status of I O Address Verify I O Clear Hold Setting Noise Filter Setting Possible Agree E H J a Input Type L Remote Password Setting Status HIW Information Error Information Error and Solution Latest Error Code 112 Contents A value other than 0 is set to Switch 5 on the intelligent function module switch setting Clear Error History Error Clear Display Format C HEX Solution Set O to Switch 5 on the intelligent Function module switch
153. attenuation band width The difference between the HPF pass band edge frequency and attenuation band width is the boundary between the attenuation band and a stop band The frequency lower than the difference between the HPF pass band edge frequency and attenuation band width is attenuated Attenuation band width 330HZ pouje UOISIeAUOD C V 48 91 92 d High pass filter 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable XS Project window gt Intelligent Function Module lt gt module name gt Parameter Item CH1 E Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion Enable enable disable setting obi M Averaging process setting O Enable Time Average Count 2 Set Averaging process setting to 6 High Pass Filter Averaging process setting 6 High Pass Filter j0 Time Average Count 0 Sampling Processing Average Moving Average Time lag 1 Time Average filter constant 2 Count Average 3 Moving Average 4 Primary Delay Filter Digital filte setting S Low Pass Filter 6 High Pass Filter 7 Band Pass Filter 3 Set HPF Pass band edge frequency to a pass band edge frequency High pass filter Set value for the High HPF Pass band edge Frequency esa 4 Set Attenuation band width to an attenuate band width The difference between the HPF pass band edge frequency and attenuation band width is the boundary between the attenuation band and a stop band The frequenc
154. attenuation band width is attenuated The sum of the BPF pass band edge frequency High and attenuation band width is the boundary between the higher attenuation band and a stop band The frequency higher than the sum of the BPF pass band edge frequency High and attenuation band width is attenuated Attenuation band width 330 Hz 93 poya UOISIeAUOD C V 48 8 5 Input Range Extended Mode Function This function extends the input range of 4 to 20mA and that of 1 to 5V Normal mode Extended mode Input range ae Input range De setting Input range Digital output value setting Input range Digital output value 4 to 20mA 4 to 20mA 4 to 20mA Extended mode 0 0 to 20 0mA 0 to 32000 4 8000 to 32000 1 to 5V 1 to 5V ies 0 0 to 5 0V Extended mode 1 Overview An analog input value can be monitored even when an error in measurement is great and the value is less than 4mA or 1V in the input range of 4 to 20mA and 1 to 5V Although the slope of the I O characteristic in the extended mode is the same as that in the normal mode the upper limit value and the lower limit value of the input range and the digital output value are extended e The resolution is the same as that the input range of 4 to 20mA and 1 to 5V has Therefore A D conversion with higher resolution than that of the input range of 0 to 20mA and 0 to 5V is achieved Inpu
155. bbreviation for the LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE field network head module Display unit A liquid crystal display to be attached to the CPU module Programming tool A generic term for GX Works2 and GX Developer Factory default setting A generic term for analog input ranges of 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 1 to 5V 10 to 10V 0 to 20mA and 4 to 20mA GX Works2 GX Developer The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers Buffer memory A memory in an intelligent function module where data such as setting values and monitoring values exchanged with a CPU module are stored FIR filter The abbreviation for a finite impulse response filter An FIR filter is a type of a digital filter Low pass filter A filter that blocks out unnecessary high frequency components in a signal High pass filter A filter that blocks out unnecessary low frequency components in a signal Band pass filter A filter that passes only necessary frequency in a signal and blocks out the others Pass band Frequency bandwidth that passes through the filter without being attenuated Attenuation band Frequency bandwidth whose attenuation rate through the filter is in a transition state Stop band Frequency bandwidth attenuated by the filter Pass band edge frequency The boundary frequency between a pass band and an attenuation band Trigger conversion request A generic term
156. c 3 Insulation 1 Shield a CH3 500k2 AS V i CH3 250 CH3 i EJ CH3 3 3 V l 500kQ w CH4 A A V 500kQ CH4 2502 CH4 A A l iy CH4 e 3 V l 500kQ w SLD j 2 FG r 3 4 For the wire use the shielded twisted pair cable In addition keep a distance of 150mm or more from the main circuit lines or power cables 2 This indicates the input resistance of the A D converter module 3 The grounds of FG between CH1 and CH2 FG between CH3 and CH4 and the internal circuit have been isolated 4 For the current input always connect the terminals V and I 5 Always connect the shielded wire for each channel to the shield terminal and ground the FG terminal In addition ground the FG terminal of the power supply module CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 3 Outside trigger input 3 9kQ 1000pF 1 2k2 TRG tT EZX J GND vw ig d G 24VDC 4 Precautions In unused channels if the circuit between two terminals is kept open an undefined digital value may be output To prevent this phenomenon perform any of the following measures Set the A D conversion enable disable setting in the unused channel to A D conversion disable Note that changing the A D conversion enable disable setting from A D conversion enable to A D conversion disable reduces the sampling cycle Short circuit the input terminals V and V of the unused channel Buu
157. ch channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO imit value CH4 upper imit value CH3 lower imit value CH3 upper imit value CH2 lower imit value CH2 upper imit value CH1 lower imit value CH1 upper imit value o z o xt po Oo Data for b8 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Normal 1 Alarm on a Warning output flag Rate alarm Un G51 status e When the value is out of the range of the set change rate specified in CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 to CH4 Rate alarm lower limit value Un G133 Warning output flag Rate alarm Un G51 corresponding to each channel is turned to Alarm ON 1 e When a warning is detected in any A D conversion enable or rate alarm output enable channels Warning output signal X8 also turns on b Clearing Warning output flag Rate alarm Un G51 e When the digital output value returns within the setting range the flag is automatically cleared e When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off it is cleared 249 sessaippy Aiowe yng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 250 18 Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 Set whether the scaling is enabled or disabled for each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b b4 b3 b2 b1 bO olofo o o o o o o o o o engensenzfcen eS ee Data for b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Enabled 1 Disabled a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request
158. condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 to Logging hold request 0 To use the logging level trigger set CHO Hold trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 to either Level trigger condition above 1 Level trigger condition below 2 or Level trigger condition pass through 3 To use the logging outside trigger set CHO Hold trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 to Outside trigger 4 For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 Setting Setting value Logging hold request 0 Level trigger condition above 1 Level trigger condition below Level trigger condition pass through AJ wl N Outside trigger a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Logging hold request 0 All channels Point A channel where a value other than the above values is set brings about an error Error code 2050 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on Logging cannot be performed When CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Disable 1 the setting for CHO Hold trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 is ignored 269 sessalppy Alowe Jeng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 270 47 CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un
159. d function 95 Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag CD a heat Pesala heh paula cua tata bs 237 Maximum value minimum value reset request YD 239 Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 255 Module error collection function 173 302 Module READY X0 0 e0 00s eeuee 232 Moving average 2000e eee eee eee 78 O Offset valsi a a ees er ee bg 279 Offset gain range specification Un G46 247 Offset gain setting 2 00000e 62 Offset gain setting mode flag XA 235 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 naaa aa Da A Beer nani Wot dancing dati ak Diana 244 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 a Rtn dns adalat AVG atid seh aye AOR A tiara EAS 244 Operating condition setting completed flag X9 234 Operating condition setting request Y9 238 P Parameter setting naa anaana 58 Pass data classification setting Un G200 260 Process Alarm rania sig coats os in g Bide hal es 102 R Range reference tables 180 Rate alarm 2 2 2 0 eee 105 S Sampling cycle a na aana 74 Sampling processing aoaaa aaa 76 Saving and restoring offset gain values 175 Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 250 Scaling function 0 000005 110 Setting range Un G20 0 243 Shifting function 2 2 0 eee 117 Switch setting 0 2 0 0
160. de Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on 23 CHO Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 Un G128 Un G130 Un G132 CHO Rate alarm lower limit value Un G127 Un G129 Un G131 Un G133 Set the change rate range of the digital output value for each channel For details on the rate alarm refer to the following e Rate alarm gt Page 105 Section 8 8 2 a Setting range e The setting range is between 32768 and 32767 3276 8 to 3276 7 set in a unit of 0 1 e Configure the two step setting of the rate alarm upper limit value and rate alarm lower limit value b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is 0 All channels Point When a value out of the above setting range or a value not satisfying the formula of rate alarm lower limit value lt rate alarm upper limit value is set to a channel an error occurs in the channel Error code 700 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on The operation is performed with the setting before the error Change the setting value since 0 is set as the default value 253 sessaippy Aiowe Jeying jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 24 CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G145 Set the setting value to detect an error for an input analog value for each channel For details o
161. digital output values within the range of 0 to 32000 For the example of scaling setting with the extended mode refer to the following Example of scaling setting lt _ Page 112 Section 8 9 4 110 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Setting procedure 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable W Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name lt gt Parameter Item CH1 Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion pe A enable disable setting Oihnae hg Averaging process setting O Enable Time Average Count 1 Disable 2 Set Scaling enable disable setting to 0 Enable Scaling enable disable O Enable z Scaling upper limit value 0 Enable Scaling lower limit value 1 Disable 3 Set values for Scaling upper limit value and Scaling lower limit value Scaling enable disable setting O Enable Scaling upper limit value 16000 Scaling lower limit value ee Item Setting range Scaling upper limit value 32000 to 32000 Scaling lower limit value Point Even when the scaling upper limit value and the scaling lower limit value are set so that the change is greater than the resolution the resolution will not increase Scaling setting must meet the following condition Scaling upper limit value gt Scaling lower limit value 111 uonouny Buljeos 6 8 4 Example of scaling setting 1 When the following values are set for a ch
162. ditions Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 is turned from Waiting for the completion 0 to Conversion completed 1 at the same time as A D conversion is completed When the number of A D conversion enabled channels is one e When A D conversion enabled channels are only CH1 and CH3 e When A D conversion enabled channels are only CH2 and CH4 The function can be used only when External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal or Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory is set to A D Conversion Timing in Switch Setting When a value other than 0 or 1 is set to Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 an error occurs Error code 2201 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on When a value other than 0 or 1 is set to Trigger conversion completed clear request Un G163 an error occurs Error code 2202 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on 4 5 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Checking the A D conversion timing The setting of the A D conversion timing can be checked with A D conversion timing monitor value Un G160 A D conversion timing monitor value Un G160 AID conversion timing 0 Normal 1 External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal 2 Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory Operation between the start of Trigger conversion and the completion
163. dow lt gt Parameter gt Network Parameter lt gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration grr re ee 210 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 3 Display the Network Configuration Settings window and configure the setting as follows Project window gt Parameter lt gt Network Parameter lt gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET c gt TE button Network Parameter CC JE Field Network Configuration Settings Module No 1 z a i fimtelioert Device Station v 258 0000 oorr 256 coco _ooFF 4 Display the Refresh Parameters window and configure the setting as follows DO Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt E button Network Parameter CC IE Field Refresh Parameters Module No 1 Kean 5 Write the set parameter to the CPU module of the master station and reset the CPU module or power off then on the programmable controllers XZ Online gt Write to PLC pes or Power OFF gt ON RESET ots RUN STOP a Npoy pe H e 0 peyosuUOD S aiNpoyy Iau G y UB u yM EOL 211 212 6 Setting on the intelligent device station 1 Create a project on GX Works2 Select LCPU for PLC Series and select LJ72GF15 T2 for PLC Type Project gt New New Project Project Type Language hb 2 Display the PLC Parameter w
164. e Digital clipping function Set digital clipping fun Digital chipping function mp enable disable setting Ere x Shift function O Enable Shifting amount to conversion In this case scale conversion is performed on the digital clipped digital operation value Therefore the digital output range of the digital operation value is determined as 0 to 32000 123 uoyoun4 Buiddi9 ebia LL s 124 4 Setting example of when the digital clipping function scaling function and shift function are used together Ex When the following values are used for the A D converter module with an input range of 0 to 5V e Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e Scaling upper limit value 12000 e Scaling lower limit value 2000 Shifting amount to conversion value 2000 Digital clipping function enable disable setting 0 Enable 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable XX Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Parameter Item CHI H Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion an enable disable setting Tenda si Averaging process setting O Enable Time Average Count 2 Set Scaling enable disable setting to 0 Enable Scaling upper limit value 0 Enable Scaling enable disable o Enabe Scaling lower limit value 3 Set values for Scaling upper limit value and Scaling lower limit value Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable Scal
165. e Un G54 to Un G57 CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 at the start of this function is 0 since the digital operation value equals the difference conversion reference value at the start Digital operation value after Digital operation value Difference conversion reference value difference conversion 2 How to use difference conversion a Starting difference conversion 1 Change CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 from No request 0 to Trigger request 1 The rise of No request 0 Trigger request 1 is detected as a trigger When the trigger is detected the digital operation value at the start is output to the difference conversion reference value The value acquired by subtracting the difference conversion reference value from the digital operation value is stored in CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 After the value is stored CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 changes to Converting difference 1 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b Stopping difference conversion 1 Change CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 from Trigger request 1 to No request 0 The fall of Trigger request 1 gt No request 0 is detected as a trigger When the trigger is detected the difference conversion stops and CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 changes to Not converted 0 After that the digital operation value is stored as it is in
166. e or drop of the module Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions A WARNING After installation and wiring attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock Wiring Precautions CAUTION Individually ground the FG terminal of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 100Q or less Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction Tighten the terminal block screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause short circuit fire or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Mitsubishi programmable controll
167. e reciprocal of the sampling cycle The range of a filter degree is 1 to 255 Point Decimals of the filter degree are raised to the next whole number to preserve its attenuation characteristic If the value becomes an even number 1 is added to the value so that the value becomes an odd number and that phase shifting is prevented Filter degree Filter degree 1 2 1x2 1 ia Decimals are raised to the next whole number 85 poya UOISIAAUOD C V 8 86 d Setting example of when a digital filter is set The following shows the setting example of when a digital filter is set Ex 1 When the low pass filter is used under the following conditions To input a SIN wave the frequency of analog inputs is changed from 100Hz to 400Hz and 400Hz to 1000Hz e Sampling cycle 80us Sampling frequency 12 5kHz e Averaging process setting Low pass filter e Pass band edge frequency 140Hz e Attenuation band width 200Hz The response time is 16 72ms Sampling cycle 80us x Filter degree 209 digit Input wave Q 4 EEEE E E A E S ea I of 100Hz 400Hz 4000Hz 0 Frequency that Frequency that is Frequency thatis Time passes through attenuated attenuated digit Wave after digital filtering CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Ex 2 When the high pass filter is used under the following conditions To input a SIN wave the frequency of analog inputs is changed from 100Hz to 400Hz and 40
168. e of offset gain values or saving and restoring offset gain values refer to the following e Offset gain Setting gt Page 62 Section 7 5 e Saving and Restoring Offset gain Values gt Page 175 Section 8 18 260 APPENDICES 36 CHO LPF Pass band edge frequency Un G300 to Un G303 Set the pass band edge frequency for the low pass filter for each channel For details on the digital filter refer to the following e Digital filter gt Page 80 Section 8 4 5 a Setting range For the setting range refer to the following e How to use the digital filters gt Page 82 Section 8 4 5 b b Enabling the setting A Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is 0 All channels Point A channel where a value other than the above values is set brings about an error Error code 2300 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on 37 CHO HPF Pass band edge frequency Un G308 to Un G311 Set the pass band edge frequency for the high pass filter for each channel For details on the digital filter refer to the following e Digital filter gt Page 80 Section 8 4 5 a Setting range For the setting range refer to the following e How to use the digital filters gt Page 82 Section 8 4 5 b b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting
169. e of the CPU module set a value between 1072 and 1081 Poi oint Specify an appropriate data such as CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G14 CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 and Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 to CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 When a setting area or a system area is specified normal operation is not guaranteed c Level data O When CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 is set to a value between 1072 and 1081 transfer refreshed values of the monitored device to Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 one after another Item Setting range Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 32768 to 32767 155 J 6u 2497 P EL S uonouny Bui6607 48 156 d Trigger setting value Set CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1085 to a value which generates a level trigger Item Setting range CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1085 32768 to 32767 2 Check on logging stop Check that CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 is ON 1 3 Check on logging data Refer to the following K gt Page 149 Section 8 13 2 3 4 Resuming logging To resume the logging set CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 to OFF 0 After logging resumes collected data is stored from the head buffer memory area of the logging data storage area In addition OFF 0 is stored in CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 Cont
170. e range satisfying the following condition When the setting value out of the range is configured the resolution and accuracy of the module may not fall within the range shown in the following performance specifications I O Conversion Characteristic of A D Conversion lt Page 279 Appendix 3 Offset gain setting can be configured for multiple channels at the same time however the setting must be configured for offset and gain channels separately When offset and gain channels are set at the same time an error occurs The error code 500 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on If a value other than Bi polar voltage 000Fp or Uni polar current OOOE is set to the range setting when Channel change request YB is turned on an error occurs The error code 171 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on When User range write request YA is turned on the integrity between the offset values and gain values is checked When an error occurs even in one channel offset gain values are not written to the module Check the value in Latest error code Un G19 and perform the following procedures to reconfigure the offset gain setting from the beginning Error Code List lt _ gt Page 221 Section 11 4 When the mode is switched from the offset gain setting mode to the normal mode by the setting of the dedicated instruction G
171. e the offset gain Module Selection Offset Gain Setting setting and click the button Module Selection Start XY Address Module Type 0030 L604D4 2GH 2 Click the button MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Ad Do you want to switch over From normal setting mode to offset gain setting mode Caution AJD conversion will be cancelled when switching over to offset gain setting mode In case of error occurrence at the target module the error will be cleared when switching over to offset gain setting mode C 62 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 3 Select Unipolar Current or Bipolar Voltage in Offset Gain Setting Range Setting 4 Select the channel to use the offset gain setting and click the SffsetSettng button Offset Gain Setting oosonsonosacH Eea E Input the offset value voltage or current in the target MELSOFT Series GX Worked channel terminal and click the s button Bumes uleBAssyO S Check that Offset Status is changed to Changed and click the gain setting button Offset Gain Setting ZSHOM X9 40 BUNOS ulegfesyo Woy BUES LGL 63 7 Input the gain value voltage or current in the target MELSOFT Series GX Works2 ee channel terminal and click the __ __ button 8 Check that Gain Status is changed to Changed Offset Gain Setting M r r x F as pa p FcH and click the cose button 9 Click the fy button MELSOFT
172. ection Detection Sectores Input signal error detection setting 0 0 to 25 0 default value 5 0 value 0 Enable Scaling enable disable setting i 1 Disable default value Page 110 Scaling function i Scaling upper limit value 32000 to 32000 default value 0 Section 8 9 Scaling lower limit value 32000 to 32000 default value 0 Digital clipping Digital clipping function enable 0 Enable Page 122 function disable setting 1 Disable default value Section 8 11 Shifting amount to conversion Page 117 Shift function 32768 to 32767 default value 0 value Section 8 10 59 Buines sejowereg eZ Item Setting value Reference Logging function 60 Logging enable disable setting 0 Enable 1 Disable default value Logging data setting 0 Digital Output Value 1 Digital Operation Value default value Logging cycle setting value us 40 to 32767 default value 4 ms 1 to 32767 default value 4 s 1 to 3600 default value 4 Logging cycle unit specification 0 us 1 ms default value 2 8 Logging points after trigger 1 to 10000 default value 5000 Hold trigger condition setting 0 Logging Hold Request default value 1 Level Trigger Conditions Rise 2 Level Trigger Conditions Fall 3 Level Trigger Conditions Rise Fall 4 External Trigger Trigger data 0 to 4999 CH1 default value 54 CH2 default value 55 CH3 defaul
173. ed Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC L series programmable controllers This manual d
174. ed on a Section 8 4 Vi 9 moving set of sampling processing the latest digital output values can be 3 c obtained a i f Page 79 The A D converter module outputs averaged digital values with the time Time lag filter Section 8 4 w constant calculated by the setting value oo 4 7 Low pass The A D converter module outputs the digital value whose unnecessary a filter high frequency component in a signal is removed iy ma Page 80 T Aara High pass The A D converter module outputs the digital value whose unnecessary a Digital filter _ Section 8 4 filter low frequency component in a signal is removed 5 Band pass The A D converter module passes only necessary frequency in a signal filter and outputs the digital value with the unnecessary frequency removed The input range to use can be selected from the following ranges e Industrial shipment setting 4 to 20mA 0 to 20mA 1 to 5V 0 to 5V 10 to 10V 0 to 10V ior i Page 57 Range switching function e User range User range setting uni polar current User range setting eee i bi polar voltage Extended mode range 4 to 20mA Extended mode 1 to 5V Extended mode y ada 2 Page 62 Offset gain setting function This function compensates for errors in digital output values Section 7 5 This function extends the input range By combining this function with the Page 94 Input range extended mode function input signal error detection function sim
175. endix 5 3 G OGLOAD k T G 0GLoaD GP OGLOAD ______ 6P 0GLOAD Command Command G P OGLOAD Un olo H Un olo H Setting Internal device JOO Constant R ZR UO GO Zn Others data Bit Word Bit Word K H O fe 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Un Start I O number of module 0 to FEy BIN 16 bits Within the range of A Start number of device where the control data is stored me Device name specified device Device which turns on for one scan at the processing completion of the dedicated Within the range of instruction i Bit specified device In error completion 1 also turns on 288 2 Control data APPENDICES Device Item Setting data Seung Set by range System area z a z The status on instruction completion is stored 1 Completion status 0 Normal completion System Other than 0 Error completion error code Specify the type of offset gain setting value to read out 0 User range bi polar voltage 0000 to 2 Pass data classification setting 1 User range uni polar current 000F User b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO DO ee eee ote adt Wisaa 100 Jens CH3 CH2 CH1 3 System area 4 CH1 Industrial
176. enuation band width Un G332 to Un G335 andann EE N suntan Rats oe a aay Sa UN gS equa ad Gog 263 CHO BPF Pass band edge frequency High Un G317 Un G319 Un G321 Un G323 262 CHO BPF Pass band edge frequency Low Un G316 Un G318 Un G320 Un G322 262 CHO Difference conversion reference value Un G180 to Un G183 00005 259 CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 000005 260 CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 2 ee eee 259 CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 250 CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G14 242 CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 272 CHO Hold trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 0204 269 CHO HPF Pass band edge frequency Un G308 to Un G311 2 0 0 0 000 008 261 CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G145 0 2 0 0 000 008 254 CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1101 273 CHO Loading interrupt enable disable setting Un G1200 to Un G1203 0004 276 CHO Logging cycle monitor value Un G1122 to Un G1133 0000 274 CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 0004 267 CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 a Tene pore sa E a RelA naa Gs arb E pa eats 267 CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 278 CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1027 TU TAE
177. erage Time lag filter constant Un G1 to Un G4 Error code 2000 to 2070 Setting error of the parameter settings of the logging function Error code 2500 to 2510 Setting error of the parameter settings of the logging load detection function Point When the logging cycle determined by CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 and CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 is shorter than the conversion cycle an error occurs and logging does not start Error code 2020 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 6 Head pointer and latest pointer The storage location of the latest data and the oldest data in the logging data storage area can be checked with the following buffer memory areas Buffer memory Description Stores a number indicating the address where the oldest data is stored in the logging data storage area for each channel The number is a count from the start address CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 Stores a number indicating the address where the latest data is stored in the logging data storage area for each channel The number is a count from the start address When 10000 points or less data are collected When data more than 10000 points are collected CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1101 ects E s r CHO Head pointer
178. ers must be installed in control panels Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal block Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock For wiring methods refer to the MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Startup and Maintenance Precautions N WARNING Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal block screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock Startup and Maintenance Precautions CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the module Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Tighten the terminal block screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction After the first use of the product module display unit and terminal block do not connect disconnect the product more than
179. ersion an error occurs Error code 370 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on However the difference conversion continues 129 8 13 Logging Function This function stores 10000 points of the digital output values in the buffer memory for each channel Up to 10000 points of data are stored to the buffer memory of the A D converter module However with the logging load detection function more than 10000 points of data can be stored by transferring the data to the file register of the CPU module In addition maintainability of user s system can be increased by using the status change of the data as a trigger to stop logging and analyzing the data change to specify a trouble cause The data is refreshed at high speed during logging Stop logging when the program needs to be used for reference 1 Logging function a Collecting logging data Logging data is collected during a fixed time period A trouble cause such as sudden change of the data can be found by analyzing the data change Logging data is collected as follows e 10000 points of digital output values or scaling operation values can be collected for each channel More than 10000 points of logging data can be stored by transferring the data to the file register of the CPU module without stopping logging gt Page 137 Section 8 13 1 The data can be collected at intervals of 40us at a minimum and of 3600
180. es into digital values through the time lag filter with a time constant of 8ms If an error occurs in the module an error code is indicated in BCD JNpPON peaH e 0 pa oauUO gs Npow JeWeAUOD q Y Ue UU TOL 207 208 3 Initial setting Description Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable Enable Enable Enable Averaging process setting Sampling Count average Moving average Primary delay filter processing Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant g So times vena Maines Warning output setting Disable Enable Disable Disable Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 20000 0 0 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 18000 0 0 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 3000 0 0 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 0 0 0 Rate alarm output setting Disable Disable Disable Enable Rate alarm detection cycle setting value 0 0 0 320 times Rate alarm upper limit value 0 0 0 20 0 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 0 0 20 0 Input signal error detection setting Upper and kower Disable Disable Disable Detection Input signal error detection setting value 10 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 Scaling enable disable setting Disable Disable Enable Disable Scaling upper limit value 0 0 32000 0 Scaling lower limit value 0 0 0 0 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 4 Device for user
181. es the result in the buffer memory Fine Rota 8 io i adjustment can be performed easily when the system starts When the input voltage or current exceeds the input range the maximum Page 122 Digital clipping function value of the digital operation value can be set to 32000 and the minimum A 8 i i value can be set to 0 or 32000 This function subtracts the difference conversion reference value from the Page 126 Difference conversion function digital operation value and stores the acquired value in the buffer 3 Section 8 12 memory This function logs the digital output value or digital operation value 10000 points of data can be logged for each channel By combining this function Page 130 Logging function f i f with the logging load detection function more than 10000 points of Section 8 13 logging data can be obtained This function converts analog values into digital values according to the input of Trigger conversion request F The method of the trigger conversion request can be selected from the Page 162 Trigger conversion function following two types Section 8 14 External trigger convert request by the external input terminal e Internal trigger conversion request by the buffer memory The function stores up to latest 16 errors and alarms that occurred in the Page 170 Error log function i A D converter module to the buffer memory Section 8 15 A This function collects errors and alarms that occurred in the A D con
182. escribes the functions and programming of a dual channel isolated high resolution analog digital converter module hereafter abbreviated as A D converter module Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC L series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to an actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems E Target module L60AD4 2GH Unless otherwise specified this manual describes the program examples in which the I O numbers of X Y00 to X YOF are assigned for an A D converter module For I O number assignment refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Operating procedures are explained using GX Works2 When using GX Developer refer to the following When using GX Developer gt Page 297 Appendix 7 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals e MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection e MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head M
183. est ON time ST system time or longer Trigger conversion request OFF time ST system time or longer 4 ST indicates the sequence scan time and the system time indicates 1ms uonoun UoIsI9AUOD JOB6uUL pL g Longer duration than Shorter duration than the trigger conversion the trigger conversion request input interval request input interval an gt Longer duration than Longer duration than 0 eae gt Controlled by the trigger conversion the trigger conversion the A D converter module request ON time Re request OFF time gt If the time from OFF to ON of the trigger CH1 Digital operation value Un G54 conversion request is shorter than the trigger A i Ss ay conversion request input interval the trigger Trigger conversion request OFF X K conversion request is ignored SE o oil 1 5 Conversion value for X Conversion value for CH1 and CH3 first time CH1 and CH3 second time CH3 Digital operation value Un G56 a 1 1 1 1 1 CH2 Digital operation value Un G55 N Conversion value for N Conversion value for CH4 Digital operation value Un G57 CH2 and CH4 first time CH2 and CH4 second time 9 Setting procedure For the setting procedure refer to the following e Switch setting L gt Page 57 Section 7 2 1 169 8 15 Error Log Function This function stores a history of errors and alarms that occurred in the A D converter module to the buffer memory Un
184. est address of error history The start address of the error history Un G1800 where the latest error is stored is stored 7 Details of error history An error history consists of the following Address data 1810 Error history No 1 Error code First two digits Last two digits 4st error of the year of the year Error Month Day occurrence H Minut time 1820 our inute Error history No 2 Second Day of the week anion 1830 Error history No 3 Empty 1960 Error history No 16 uonoun4 607 Jou SL g Empty 171 2 When the 17th error occurs The 17th error is stored in Error history No 1 and the value 1810 start address of Error history No 1 is stored to Latest address of error history Un G1800 Latest address of error history Un G1800 Address gt 1810 Error history No 1 1820 Error history No 2 The 17th error is stored in Error history No 1 and the 1st error history will be erased 2nd error 1830 Error history No 3 3rd error 1960 Error history No 16 16th error Point The same process for errors is used when an alarm occurs Once the error history storage area becomes full subsequent errors overwrite the existing data starting from Error history No 1 and continue sequentially thereafter
185. ff e Error completion The device turns on at the END processing for the scan where the G P OGLOAD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing END END END END processing processing processing processing Program m e Execution completion of the ON G P OGLOAD instruction G P OGLOAD OFF instruction 0 ON OFF 1 Completion device lt 1 __ ON Execution failed i BOO O H Completion status OFF i OFF Execution succeeded W indication device 0 1 i 1 scan 4 Errors The instruction has no errors 290 APPENDICES 5 Program example The following shows the program to read out the offset gain setting value of the A D converter module which is installed in I O number X Y10 to X Y1F by turning on M11 Sets a control data M11 2 tt mov KO D102 J Specifies voltage SET M12 Reads a offset gain setting value M12 Dedicated instruction GP OGLOAD ut D100 M20 i 7 GP OGLOAD A M20 M21 a 1 AF RST M12 J M20 M21 7 7 Sere 1 H Processing when an instruction execution is failed LEND avo190 d 9 G xipueddy uoHonsjsu pa eoipaq G xipueddy 291 Appendix 5 4 G P OGSTOR Command G oGsTOR 1 E hoo nv Ooo H Command GP OGSTOR f GP OGSTOR Un Setting Internal device JOO Constant R ZR UO
186. following formula to calculate a change rate to be set with the change amount of voltage and current to detect a warning Change amount of the voltage current to detect a warning V mA 00 x Change rate to be set 0 1 Gain voltage current V mA Offset voltage current V mA 4 Values after the decimal point are omitted 107 wee aey 73 s uonouny jndjno bulueMm g8 5 Examples to use a rate alarm The change rate of digital output values in a limited range can be monitored easily as follows Ex 1 To monitor that a rising rate of a digital output value is within the specified range Change rate of digital output value A Rate alarm upper limit 30 20 a Rate alarm lower limit 9 y Ex 2 To monitor that a Change rate of digital output value 20 30 Ex 3 To monitor that a Change rate of digital output value 10 10 108 Time drop rate of a digital output value is within the specified range A Time Rate alarm upper limit nr Rate alarm lower limit change rate of a digital output value is within the specified range A Rate alarm upper limit Time R Rate alarm lower limit CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 6 Setting procedure 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable W Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name lt gt Parameter Item CH1 Basic set
187. for External trigger convert request external input terminal and Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 Hold trigger A request to stop logging PACKING LIST The following items are included in the package of this product Before use check that all the items are included L60AD4 2GH L60AD4 2GH Before Using the Product 16 CHAPTER 1 A D CONVERSION MODULE CHAPTER 1 A D CONVERSION MODULE This chapter describes the applications and features of the A D converter module 1 1 Application This module converts analog values input from external devices to digital output values and inputs the converted data to a CPU module The CPU module can accept the digital output values from the conversion as information will Analog to digital conversion Analog signal continuous signal Digital signal discrete signal With the A D converter module the following application is possible Measuring the heat from a heater or other devices in the connection with a power conditioner Power conditioner uojeoddy OOOOOO0e000000 17 1 2 Features 1 2 1 Main features 1 High speed continuous logging With the logging function 10000 points of logging data of digital
188. fset gain setting of all channels here the user range setting is used An invalid value is set to the offset gain setting iu p g g 1201 Ea If the error occurs again a failure might have The channel where the error has occurred cannot be identified occurred on the module Please consult a local Mitsubishi representative Start over the offset gain setting of the channel f where the error has occurred 7 An invalid value is set to the offset gain setting 42001 Poe If the error occurs again a failure might have The channel where the error has occurred fits in O occurred on the module Please consult a local Mitsubishi representative s The G P OGSTOR instruction was executed in the offset gain Do not execute the G P OGSTOR instruction in the 161 setting mode offset gain setting mode e The G P OGSTOR instruction has been consecutively e Execute the G P OGSTOR instruction only once 162 executed per module e For the offset gain setting a setting value has been e Write the setting value into the flash memory only consecutively written to the flash memory more than 25 times once for each offset gain setting e Execute the G P OGLOAD and G P OGSTOR e The G P OGSTOR instruction has been executed on a j instructions to the same module module different from the one on which the G P OGLOAD f e After executing the G P OGLOAD instruction on 163 instruction was executed i the module from w
189. function list list of I O signals and list of buffer memory addresses 3 1 General Specifications For the general specifications of the A D converter module refer to the following The manual Safety Guidelines included with the CPU module or head module suoneoyioeds jeisues p e 25 3 2 Performance Specifications The following table lists the performance specifications of the A D converter module Item Model L60AD4 2GH Number of analog input points 4 points 4 channels Voltage 10 to 10VDC input resistance 1M Q Analog input Current 0 to 20mADC input resistance 250 Q Digital output 32000 to 32000 When using the scaling function 32768 to 32767 I O characteristics resolution A ae Maximum Analog input range Digital output value resolution 0 to 10V 312 5uV 0 to 5V 0 to 32000 156yuV 1 to 5V 125yuV Voltage 10 to 10V 32000 to 32000 312 5uV 1 to 5V Extended mode 8000 to 32000 125V User range setting 7 32000 to 32000 200yV 2 bi polar voltage 0 to 20mA 625nA 0 to 32000 4 to 20mA 500nA Current 4 to 20mA Extended mode 8000 to 32000 500nA User range setting T 0 to 32000 400nA 2 uni polar current Accuracy accuracy for the Reference accuracy Within 0 05 16digit maximum value of the 3 Temperature coefficient digital output value
190. g A 768 Uni polar current 3 Maximum resolution in the user range setting Point Use the value within the practical analog input range and practical digital output range for each input range If a value is out of the range the resolution and accuracy may not fall within the range of performance specifications Do not use the value in the dotted line region in the graph of current input characteristic Do not input a value of 30mA or more This may damage the elements UOISJ AUOD C V JO ONSIe OeJeUD UOISJEAUOD O xIPUeddy 283 Appendix 4 AID Conversion Accuracy 284 The A D conversion accuracy is the accuracy for the maximum value of digital output value Even if the offset gain setting and input range are changed and thus the input characteristic is changed the accuracy does not change and is kept within the range of the described performance specifications The following graph shows the fluctuation range of accuracy when the range of 10 to 10V is selected The reference accuracy is 0 05 16digit and the temperature coefficient is 40 1ppm C or less Except when noise influences 32000 Fluctuation range Digital output value 9 32000 10 0 10 Analog input value V APPENDICES Appendix 5 Dedicated Instruction This chapter describes the dedicated instructions that can be used in the A D converter module Appendix 5 1 Instruction list The follow
191. g by a display unit gt Page 195 Section 9 4 217 11 1 Checking on the Module Detailed Information The following describes how to check the errors on the module detailed information XW Diagnostics gt System Monitor 1 Select the A D converter module in Main Block and click the _Detaed infomation button O Error Major Error A Minor Error _ Assignment Error_ 2 Module s Detailed Information of the A D converter module is displayed 218 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 Checking by Latest Error Code Un G19 The following describes how to check the error codes and alarm codes in Latest error code Un G19 XT Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch m Device Device Name F i ference Buffer Memory Module Start 0030 HEX Address yilDEC Display format Modify Value we 32 32 64 ASC g 16 Details Open Save Address Flep cllalolelz els 432m0 19 0 olol olol olol 0 cM o ol olo 112 zlo oo 000000000 0000 o 21 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 oloo o zzlo oo 000 0000000000 o 23l0lololololololololololololololo 0 Point When multiple errors or alarms occur the latest error code or alarm code which is recognized by the A D converter module is stored in Latest error code Un G19 6L9 uN apo 1043 838427 Aq BurjosyuD Z 219 11
192. ge frequency Attenuation band width lt 12000 40us f 330 lt attenuation band width e 0 lt pass band edge frequency e Pass band edge frequency Attenuation band width lt 6000 80us e 170 lt attenuation band width e 0 lt pass band edge frequency Set an attenuation band width for each channel Set an attenuation band The sum of an LPF pass band edge frequency and the attenuation band width becomes the boundary between the attenuation band and a stop band The frequency higher than the sum of the LPF pass band edge frequency and attenuation band width is attenuated High pass filter Averaging process setting Un G24 Set a relevant bit of a channel where filter processing is necessary to High pass filter 6 CHO HPF Pass band edge frequency Un G308 to Un G311 Set a pass band edge frequency for the high pass filter The following table shows the setting range of the frequency When a frequency out of the setting range is set an error occurs Error code 2310 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on Sampling cycle Setting range e 0 lt Pass band edge frequency Attenuation band width 40us 330 lt Attenuation band width e Pass band edge frequency lt 12000 e 0 lt Pass band edge frequency Attenuation band width 80us e 170 lt attenuation band width e Pass band edge frequency lt 6000 CHO A
193. ger conversion function can be used in the trigger conversion mode 299 Jedojeneq X9 Jo uonesedo Z xipueddy Jadojensq X9 Bulsp u yM z xipueddy Appendix 8 External Dimensions The following figure shows the external dimensions of A D converter module 1 L60AD4 2GH cH 8 1 45 90 DIN rail center 45 orv Uru Ch mA A A ozo D Unit mm 300 INDEX A D conversion accuracy 0005 284 A D conversion completed flag Un G10 242 A D conversion completed flag XE 237 A D conversion enable disable function 73 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO 240 A D conversion method 2 00 74 A D conversion timing monitor value Un G160 256 Addition of modules 0000000050 56 Alarm output function 2 0000 102 Auto refreshi aeiaai A ee 61 Averaging processing 00 eee eens 77 Averaging processing specification for the Q64AD UN GY 000 00 08 241 Averaging processing specification Un G24 245 Band pass filter band frequency pass filter 81 CH1 Industrial shipment setting offset value L Un G202 to CH4 User range setting gain value H UN G 233 e roia tienes 0 Sane ge tones doled 260 Channel change completed flag XB 236 Channel change request YB 239 CHO Att
194. gram 1 Difference conversion function program 1 Logging function program 1 Input signal error detection function program Warning output function program 1 1 A program that is created according to the function to be used Bulwiwes6ojq JO BINPSd0Jq OL Read program for Digital output value Digital operation value Warning output flag and Input signal error detection flag 2 Aprogram that is added according to the control Error reset program target Create a program if needed 197 10 2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration This section describes the system configuration of A D converter module and a program example of operation condition 1 System configuration The following figure shows an example of the system configuration when the module is used in a standard system configuration A D converter module L60AD4 2GH CPU module L26CPU BT Input module LX40C6 Se Ce Output module LY42NT1P ial ial jol a Power supply module L61P XIYO0 XIY10 X Y30X Y40 X V50 SEND cover L6EC to to to to to X YOF X Y2F X Y3F X Y4F X Y8F Point If the LO2CPU is used assign I O of the A D converter module to X Y30 to X Y3F so that the I O assignment of the A D converter module is the same as that in the above system Also assign the I O of LX40C6 to X Y40 to X Y4F and that of LY42NT1P to X Y50 to X Y8F 2 Pr
195. he case of the following status Operating condition setting completed flag X9 turns off e When Operating condition setting request Y9 is on gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program ON Module READY X0 Operating condition setting completed flag X9 Operating condition setting request Y9 A D conversion completed zA a OFF a flag XE 4 Offset gain setting mode flag XA a Offset gain setting mode When registering the value which has been adjusted with the offset gain setting to the module use Offset gain setting mode flag XA as an interlock condition to turn on then off User range write request YA For the offset gain setting refer to the following e Offset gain Setting lt 3 Page 62 Section 7 5 gt Controlled by the A D converter module User range write request YA gt Controlled by the program ss Module READY X0 OFF 2 2a ON ON x Offset gain setting mode x gt g status flag XA MN OFF 5 ON i Es 2 9 Z 7 a _ OFF OFF BO n Q v n b Normal mode In the user range restoration use Offset gain setting mode flag XA as an interlock condition to turn on then off User range write request YA For user range restoration refer to the following e Saving restoring offset gain values gt Page 62 Section 7 5 cae
196. he following e Digital filter gt Page 80 Section 8 4 5 For the low pass filter Set the attenuation band width for each channel The sum of the LPF Pass band edge frequency and attenuation band width is the boundary between the attenuation band and stop band Frequency higher than the sum of the LPF Pass band edge frequency and attenuation band width is attenuated For the high pass filter Set the attenuation band width for each channel The difference between the HPF Pass band edge frequency and attenuation band width is the boundary between the attenuation band and stop band Frequency lower than the difference between the HPF Pass band edge frequency and attenuation band width is attenuated For the band pass filter Set the attenuation band width for each channel The difference between the BPF Pass band edge frequency Low and attenuation band width is the boundary between the lower attenuation band and stop band Frequency lower than the difference between the BPF Pass band edge frequency Low and attenuation band width is attenuated The sum of the BPF Pass band edge frequency High and attenuation band width is the boundary between the higher attenuation band and stop band Frequency higher than the sum of the BPF Pass band edge frequency High and attenuation band width is attenuated a Setting range For the setting range refer to the following e How to use the digital filters gt Page 82 Section 8 4 5
197. he latest error code or alarm code detected in the A D converter module is stored For details on error codes and alarm codes refer to the following e Error Code List Page 221 Section 11 4 e Alarm Code List K_ gt Page 226 Section 11 5 a Clearing an error Turn on then off Error clear request YF 242 APPENDICES 7 Setting range Un G20 The range which was set as the input range can be checked b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Input range Setting value 4 to 20mA OH 0 to 20mA 1H 1 to 5V 2u 0 to 5V 3y 10 to 10V 44 0 to 10V 5H 4 to 20mA Extended mode Ay 1 to 5V Extended mode Bu User range setting uni polar current Ey User range setting bi polar voltage Fu Point Input range cannot be changed in Setting range Un G20 For changing the setting refer to the following e Switch Setting L3 Page 57 Section 7 2 FFFF is set in the offset gain setting mode sessalppy Aiowe Jeng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 243 244 8 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 Specify the channel to perform the offset gain setting adjustment Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 channel to adjust the offset Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 channel to adjust the gain b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b b4 b3 b2 b1 bO
198. here data is restored execute e The G P OGSTOR instruction has been executed ahead of the G P OGSTOR instruction on the module to the G P OGLOAD instruction where the data is restored 470 The offset gain setting was configured exceeding the maximum No more offset gain setting is reflected on the number of times operation successfully When Channel change request YB turns on in the offset gain Set User range setting uni polar current or User X setting mode a value other than User range setting uni polar k 4711 f range setting bi polar voltage in the input range current or User range setting bi polar voltage is set in the input aiin ing range setting 9 The averaging time value set in CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Un G1 to EAA E y i Set the averaging time to a value within the range of 2001 Un G4 is outside the range of 2 to 5000ms The channel where the error has occurred fits in O 2 to 5000ms 221 SI 8POD JOA HLL Error code Description and cause of error Action decimal The averaging count value set in CHO Time Average Count 300 Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Un G1 to Set the averaging count to a value in the range of 4 Un G4 is outside the range of 4 to 65000 to 65000 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O The moving average count value se
199. idth e 170 lt Attenuation band width e Pass band edge frequency Low lt Pass band edge frequency High CHO Loading interrupt enable disable setting Un G1200 to Set Enable 0 or Disable 1 in CHO Loading 250001 Un G1203 is set to a value other than 0 and 1 interrupt enable disable setting Un G1200 to The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Un G1203 The value set in CHO Logging load points setting value ee 25101 Un G1208 to Un G1211 is outside the range of 10 to 10000 59t 2 Value within the range of 10 to 10000 in CHO The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Logging load polis estan valu UniG1208 to Un G1211 i This error code can be cleared by turning on and then off Error clear request YF 2 An error code is not stored in Latest error code Un G19 but in the completion status of the G P OGSTOR instruction 1 S17 POD JOUZ LL 225 11 5 Alarm Code List The following shows an alarm code list Alarm code ROR i q Description and cause of alarm Action decimal The corresponding bit of Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 and Warning output signal X8 turn off automatically when the digital A process alarm or a rate alarm is occurring i A operation value returns to the value within the The channel where the process alarm or the rate alarm has aai setting range at a process alarm occurred fits in O Sa a The corresponding bit of Warning output flag A va
200. ift conversion and difference conversion 103 wee SS800 q 88 uonouny nd no buiueMm g8 5 Setting procedure 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable XD Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Parameter ees ___Item CHi E Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion en enable disable setting O Enable he Averaging process setting O Enable Time Average Count 2 Set Warning output setting to 0 Enable Warning output function Warning output setting Process alarm upper upper limit value Sets for warnings on A O Enable x O Enable 1 Disable 3 Set values to Process alarm upper upper limit value Process alarm upper lower limit value Process alarm lower upper limit value and Process alarm lower lower limit value Warning output function Warning output setting Process alarm upper upper limit value Process alarm upper lower limit value Process alarm lower upper limit value Process alarm lower lower limit value Sets for warnings oni O Enable 20000 16000 10000 Item Setting range Process alarm upper upper limit value Process alarm upper lower limit value Process alarm lower upper limit value Process alarm lower lower limit value 32768 to 32767 Point The warning output setting must meet the following condition Process alarm upper upper limit value
201. igating error causes stopping logging and saving the data before and after an error occurs Since the data before and after a hold trigger a request to stop logging occurs a trouble occurs can be saved the data of the trouble cause can be quickly specified gt Page 148 Section 8 13 2 131 uonouny Bui6607 48 3 Operation of logging a Starting logging Logging starts when CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Enabled 0 and Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off Logging is performed on the preset logging cycle CHO Logging enable disable setting cow Un G1000 to Un G1003 1 See ON Operating condition setting request Y9 OFF N ON on Operating condition setting completed flag X9 OFF Start logging b Logging data Logging data is stored to the following buffer memory areas for each channel Buffer memory Vv 1st data 2nd data 3rd data 4th data 1 When data is stored in the 10000th ee NS Sth data data point area data is overwritten NON 6th data from the 1st data area 9999th data gt 10000th data LJ Data to be collected Channel Storage area for logging data CH1 CH1 Logging data Un G5000 to Un G14999 CH2 CH2 Logging data Un G15000 to Un G24999 CH3 CH3 Logging data Un G25000 to Un G34999 CH4 CH4 Logging data Un G35000 to Un
202. imes The rate alarm detection cycle is 400us 80us x 5 Times A digital output value is compared in 400us intervals to check the change rate CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 4 Judgment of rate alarm A change rate is judged with the rate alarm upper limit value and the rate alarm lower limit value converted to digital values per rate alarm detection cycle The following shows the conversion formula of judgment value for rate alarm detection Judgement value for rate alarm __ RH or RL 5 aa x DMax detection digit 1000 Item Description RH Rate alarm upper limit value Unit 0 1 RL Rate alarm lower limit value Unit 0 1 DMax Maximum digital output value of the input range 32000 Point Values after the decimal point are omitted Ex The judgment value under the following conditions e A D conversion enabled channels CH1 e Averaging process setting Sampling processing e CH1 Rate alarm detection cycle setting value 10 times CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 250 25 0 e CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value 50 5 0 250 x 0 001 x 32000 8000 digit 50 x 0 001 x 32000 1600 digit The present value is compared to the previous value in a rate alarm detection cycle of 400us sampling cycle x 10 A digital value is judged if it increases 8000digits 25 0 or more or judged if the increase is 1600digits or less 5 from the previous value when the maximum digital output value is 32000 Use the
203. indow and configure the setting as follows Project window lt gt Parameter lt gt PLC Parameter gt Communication Head Setting CC Link IE Field Communication Head Parameter Setting CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 3 Add the A D converter module L60AD4 2GH to the GX Works2 project Project window Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt New Module New Module m Module Selection Module Type analog Module ap Module Name 60404 26 v m Mount Position Base No F Y Mounted Slot No 0 a Acknowledge I O Assignment I Specify start XY address 0000 H 1 Module Occupy 16 points m Title setting Title l ca 4 Display the Switch Setting window for the A D converter module L60AD4 2GH and configure the setting as follows Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt L60AD4 2GH gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0000 L60AD4 2GH Input Range Setting 4 to ZOMA 4 to 20ma Drive Mode Setting Normal AJD Converter Processing Mode AJD Converter Timing Normal Internal Scan S This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value ma a Npoy peH 0 peyosuUOD S ainpoyy JeWWeAUOD G y UB u yM EOL 213 5 Display the initial setting window for the A D converter mod
204. ing data points to be collected after a hold trigger a request to stop logging occurs can be set Logging data are stored in buffer memory areas Logging hold request Generating a hold trigger from a program at certain timings v Hold trigger 1st data z a request to stop logging 2nd data Level trigger 3rd data z Monitoring a stored value of a certain device and generating 4th data i Logging points after trigger a hold trigger if the value satisfies the preset condition as i i shown below 5th data z Logging is stopped when the set A request to stop logging is processed if the stored value reaches the setting value 6th data 4d points of data are collected after the hold trigger is generated Stored value of a device to be monitored A 9999th data 10000th data A trigger is A trigger is generated generated Di E EREE f EIET e NE E setting value Time Logging outside trigger Generating a hold trigger when an outside trigger is detected 2 Application a Storing more than 10000 points of data without stopping logging More than 10000 points of data can be stored by transferring the logging data stored in the buffer memory of the A D converter module to file registers of the CPU module without stopping logging The takt time of a test which requires high speed conversion can be shortened K gt Page 137 Section 8 13 1 b Invest
205. ing resumes are not initialized e After logging resumes collected data is stored from the head CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 buffer memory area of the logging data storage area To refer to the logging data check which area has valid data with CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 153 8 13 4 Level trigger When a target value in the buffer memory monitored satisfies a preset condition a hold trigger a request to stop logging is generated The target data of a level trigger is monitored on the refresh cycle of the digital output value and the digital operation value To use a level trigger CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 must be set to ON 1 in advance When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is set to ON 1 the trigger condition waits for itself being satisfied The logging hold processing starts when the trigger condition is satisfied CH1 Logging hold request Un G1008 OFF ON Trigger condition Unestablished Established established unestablished i A Hold trigger is i generated The logging is held a eee y v CH1 Logging data The data stored before the last a Un G5000 to Un G14999 10000 data are discarded i 4 gt i CH1 Logging points after trigger Un G1048 l 4 gt i CH1 Number of logging data Un G1106 lt 10000 points ieee gt Controlled by the A D converter module Point When Operating condition
206. ing table lists the dedicated instructions that can be used in the A D converter module Instruction Description A e The operation mode is changed to the offset gain setting mode G P OFFGAN e The operation mode is changed to the normal mode G P OGLOAD The offset gain setting value in the user range setting is read out to the CPU module The offset gain setting value in the user range setting stored in the CPU module is restored to G P OGSTOR the A D converter module SI uononasu G xIpueddy uonondjsu peyeolpeq S xipueddy 285 a Appendix 5 2 G P OFFGAN Command G OFFGAN TL G OFFGAN Command GP OFFGAN f GP OFFGAN un Setting Internal device JOO Constant R ZR UO GO Zn Others data Bit Word Bit Word K H O 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Un Start I O number of module 0 to FE BIN 16 bits Mode change 0 Changed to the normal mode 1 Changed to the offset gain setting mode 0 1 BIN 16 bits When a value other than the above is set the mode is changed to the offset gain setting mode 2 Functions This instruction switches the operation mode of the A D converter module e Normal mode gt offset gain setting mode Offset gain setting mode flag XA is on e Offset gain setting mode normal mode Offset gain setting mode flag XA is off Poi
207. ing upper limit value 12000 Scaling lower limit value 20 4 Seta value to Shifting amount to conversion value Shifting amount to conversion 20 value 5 Set Digital clipping function enable disable setting to 0 Enable Digital clipping function Set digital clipping fun Digital clipping function O Enable z enable disable setting j Shift function 0 Enable Shifting amount to conversion 1 Disable CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS The following figure and table show the values stored in the digital output values and digital operation values 1 Digital output value Digital output value Digital clipping Output range 768 to 32767 32000 Output range 0 to 32000 v 2 Value after digital clipping 2 Value after digital clipping 14000 Scaling 12000 Upper limit value 32000 gt 12000 Lower limit value 0 2000 v a Value after scaling Shift addition Adds 2000 to the value after scaling 4 Digital operation value Analog input voltage V Digital output value Digital operation value 0 12 768 4000 0 0 4000 1 6400 6000 2 12800 8000 3 19200 10000 4 25600 12000 5 32000 14000 5 12 32767 14000 Point When the digital clipping function is used with the scaling function shift function and difference conversion function scale conversion shift addition and difference conversion are executed on the val
208. ing value Time Logging outside trigger Generating a hold trigger when an outside trigger is detected When a hold trigger a request to stop logging is detected during logging operation the operation stops after the points of the data specified with CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 are logged CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 Enabled 0 ON Operating condition OFF setting request Y9 ng Operating condition setting OFE completed flag X9 Hold trigger Logging the points of data that is set in Logging points after trigger i gt on Logging hold flag GEE 148 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 1 Logging points after trigger Set CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 to the number of data collected in the period from the detection of a hold trigger a request to stop logging to logging operation stop 2 Check on logging stop Check that CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 is ON 1 3 Checking logging data a Head pointer and latest pointer The storage location of the latest data and the oldest data in the logging data storage area can be checked with the following buffer memory areas Buffer memory Description Stores a number indicating the address where the oldest data is stored in the logging data storage area for each channel The number is a count from the start address CHO Head pointer U
209. input characteristic The following graph shows the current input characteristic Digital output value 0 Digital output value 0 32767 Practical analog input range 32000 768 32000 32768 20 10 0 4 10 20 Analog input current mA Practical analog input range lt 4 gt 32767 30 32000 3 8000 8768 7777 32000 32768 30 20 10 0 4 10 20 Analog input current mA 30 i Gain Digital output Maximum No Input range setting Offset value z p value value resolution 1 4 to 20MA 4mA 20mA 500nA 0 to 32000 2 0 to 20mA OmA 20mA 625nA 3 4 to 20mA Extended mode 4mA 20mA 8000 to 32000 500nA User range setting A 4 4 0 to 32000 400nA Uni polar current 282 APPENDICES 4 Set the offset value and gain value in user range setting within the range satisfying the following conditions If the following conditions are not satisfied A D conversion may not be properly performed gain value lt 20mA offset value gt OmA gain value offset value gt 12 8mA 2 When analog input exceeds the range of the digital output value the digital output value is fixed to the maximum or minimum i Digital output value Input range setting Minimum Maximum 4 to 20mA 768 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA Extended mode 8768 32767 User range settin
210. ints of the save destination file register ZO Index register for logging load position Z4 Index register for the save destination file register ZRO Save destination file register D40 Last logging load pointer ladder This program finishes the interrupt processing by turning on the annunciator when the interrupt being not captured is detected This program takes the following time at a maximum to process the logging load pointer detection interrupt Processing time eit LO2CPU LO2CPU P L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT Overhead time before startup of the interrupt program 66 0us 61 0us Overhead time at termination of the interrupt program 28 0us 26 0us Sequence scan time of the interrupt ladder program 460 0us Total processing time of the interrupt program 554us 547us Point Set CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 and CHO Logging load points setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 so that the interval of a logging load pointer detection interrupt is longer than the total processing time of the interrupt program CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b A program example which does not detect a logging load pointer detection interrupt being not captured E When the logging data are stored every 1000 points to the data registers of the CPU module under the following conditions CPU module L26CPU BT CH1 Logging load points setting value Un G1208 1000 e Interrupt Pointer Start No 60 e Interr
211. ion 8 8 1 Process alarm This function outputs a warning when a digital operation value enters the preset range Warning output range iaj A Digital Out of warning output range operation e Included value Warning Warnin Upper upper i limit value Upper lower limit value N Warning cleared CH1 digital operation value Lower upper limit value CH2 digital operation value 7 Lower lower limit value Warning N Time Un G50 b0 CH1 Warning output flag OFF Process alarm upper limit value i ON CH1 Warning output flag i Process alarm lower limit value i OFF Un G50 b1 i ON CH2 Warning output flag OFF Process alarm upper limit value D Un G50 b2 ON OFF Warning output signal X8 102 1 2 3 4 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Operation when a warning is output When a digital operation value is equal to or greater than the process alarm upper upper limit value or the value is equal to or smaller than the process alarm lower lower limit value and hence the value is within the warning output range a warning is output as follows e Alarm ON 1 is stored in Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 e Warning output signal X8 turns on e The ALM LED turns on e Alarm code 10 AD is stored in Latest error code Un G19 The following figure shows the alarm code stored 1040 v Fixed Process alarm cha
212. ion No request 0 gt ere i request Un G161 Conversion request 1 nside trigger conversion reques Combletion Trigger conversion completed Waiting for the completion 0 gt i i flag Un G162 Conversion completed 1 166 6 Trigger conversion clear request The following describes Trigger conversion clear request a Trigger conversion clear request The following shows the operation where Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 is turned from Waiting for the completion 0 to Conversion completed 1 by turning Trigger conversion completed clear request Un G163 from No request 0 to Clear request 1 Trigger conversion request OFF OFF CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program A D conversion Waiting for A D trigger input conversion AID conversion Waiting for trigger input Waiting for trigger input Digital operation value i x First conversion value x Second conversion value 5 ON A gt D 1 i ON Trigger conversion E EN 1 A completed flag Waiting for OFF Un G1 62 the completion 0 2 ON Trigger conversion Clear request 1 completed clear OFF 1 N i 1 ie We request Un G163 No request 0 Even when Trigger conversion request is turned on while the setting in Trigge
213. is Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or hand
214. is equal to or less than the rate alarm lower limit value s a warning is output as follows e Alarm ON 1 is stored in Warning output flag Rate alarm Un G51 e Warning output signal X8 turns on e The ALM LED turns on Alarm code 10 AD is stored in Latest error code Un G19 The following shows the alarm code stored 10A0 Ww Fixed Rate alarm channel number 2 Rate alarm upper limit 3 Rate alarm lower limit However digital conversion continues on the channel where a warning was output Operation after a warning was output When a digital output value is smaller the rate alarm upper limit value or larger than the rate alarm lower limit value and return to within the setting range after a warning is output 0 is stored to the corresponding channel number bit of Warning output flag Rate alarm Un G51 When all the channels return to within the setting range Warning output signal X8 turns on and the ALM LED turns off However alarm code 10 AD stored in Latest error code Un G19 is not cleared Turn on then off Error clear request YF to clear alarm code 10 AD Detection cycle Set the rate alarm detection cycle in the rate alarm detection cycle setting The rate alarm detection cycle is calculated by multiplying the set value by the conversion cycle Ex The rate alarm detection cycle under the following conditions e A D conversion enabled channels CH1 to CH3 CH1 Rate alarm detection cycle 5 t
215. is value is calculated by adding Input range width gain value offset value x Input signal error detection setting value to a gain value The input signal error detection setting value is calculated by the following formula Input signal error detection Gain valiecof each rana Input signal error detection _ upper limit value en US OF each range x 1000 setting value Gain value of each range Offset value of each range b Input signal error detection lower limit value This value is calculated by subtracting Input range width gain value offset value x Input signal error detection setting value from the lower limit value of the input range offset value The input signal error detection setting value is calculated by the following formula Lower limit value ofeach _ Input signal error detection i i range lower limit value Input signal error detection _ g x 1000 setting value Gain value of each range Offset value of each range The following table lists the lower limit value offset value and gain value for each range Analog input range Lower limit value Offset value Gain value 0 to 10V ov 10V 0 to 5V ov 5V 1 to 5V 1V 5V Voltage 10 to 10V 10V ov 10V 1 to 5V Extended mode 1V 5V The analog input value of The analog input value setas The analog input value set as when the digital output value ae gimp an offset value by users a gain value by users User range setting Bi polar
216. it setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 us 0 40 to 32767 ms 1 1 to 32767 s 2 1 to 3600 b Actual logging cycle The actual logging cycle is an integral multiple of the conversion cycle of the digital output value or digital operation value Ex When the A D conversion is performed for CH1 to CH4 with the sampling processing The actual logging cycle is an integral multiple of 80s 40us x 2 with the value set in CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 and CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 as the upper limit value c Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting d Default value The default value is 4 for CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 All channels The default value is ms 1 for CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 All channels Point In the channel where the following conditions are set an error occurs Error code 2010 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on Logging cannot be performed When a value out of the above setting range is set in either CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 or CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 e When the set logging cycle is below the update cycle of data to be logged When CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un
217. l operation value after adjustment 1 CH1 Digital output value 48000 Un G11 32767 32000 CH1 Shifting amount to conversion value 16000 Un G150 f 4 ri 0 p 1 Digital output value 2 CH1 Digital operation value UniG54 before adjustment 16000 32000 0 Analog input voltage V z T CH1 Digital operation value Analog input voltage V CH1 Digital output value Un G11 A Un G54 10 32000 16000 o gt 5 16000 0 T 0 16000 2 5 16000 32000 g 10 32000 32767 4 Because the value exceeds the range of 32768 to 32767 the value is fixed to 32767 the upper limit value 119 120 4 Setting example of when both the scaling function and shift function are used Ex When the following values are used for the A D converter module with an input range of 0 to 5V Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable Scaling upper limit value 12000 Scaling lower limit value 2000 Shifting amount to conversion value 2000 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable T Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt gt module name c gt Parameter item E CH1 E Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion z enable disable setting O Enable Averaging process setting O Enable Time Average Count Set Scaling enable disable setting to 0 Enable Scaling upper limit
218. l shipment setting offset value L 0 R W 203 CB CH1 Industrial shipment setting offset value H 0 R W 204 CCH CH1 Industrial shipment setting gain value L 0 R W 205 CDy CH1 Industrial shipment setting gain value H 0 R W 206 CEy CH2 Industrial shipment setting offset value L 0 R W 207 CFy CH2 Industrial shipment setting offset value H 0 R W 208 DOW CH2 Industrial shipment setting gain value L 0 R W 35 sessaippy Ajoweyy yng Jo sI S E Address Address 2 decimal hexadecimal name Default Read Write 209 Diy CH2 Industrial shipment setting gain value H 0 R W 210 D24 CH3 Industrial shipment setting offset value L 0 R W 211 D3y CH3 Industrial shipment setting offset value H 0 R W 212 D44 CH3 Industrial shipment setting gain value L 0 R W 213 D54 CH3 Industrial shipment setting gain value H 0 R W 214 D64 CH4 Industrial shipment setting offset value L 0 R W 215 D74 CH4 Industrial shipment setting offset value H 0 R W 216 D8y CH4 Industrial shipment setting gain value L 0 R W 217 D94 CH4 Industrial shipment setting gain value H 0 R W 218 DAY CH1 User range setting offset value L 0 R W 219 DBy CH1 User range setting offset value H 0 R W 220 DCy CH1 User range setting gain value L 0 R W 221 DDy CH1 User range setting gain value H 0 R W 222 DEy CH2 User range setting offset v
219. lag Un G10 b0 OFF O Error clear request YF OFF 96 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 1 Detection condition Detection i Detection condition method Analog input value A Error detection Fo Input signal error __ At the input signal error detection upper limit value or detection upper Upper lower limit n limit value above and at the input signal error detection lower limit detection value or below Input signal error detection lower limit value Error ddion N gt Time Analog input value A No error detection Input signal error PRN te detection upper Lower limit At the input signal error detection lower limit value or limit value detection below Input signal error detection lower limit value Error detection D gt Time Analog input value o A N Error 5 detection Ee 2 Input signal error t P x ae detection upper no Upper limit At the input signal error detection upper limit value or limit value a D detection above m Input signal error 3 detection lower limit value No error D detection 2 fe gt Time 5 T Disconnection Performs disconnection detection For details refer to the following 2 detection Disconnection detection gt Page 98 Section 8 7 1 a g 97 a Disconnection detection 2 3 4 98 This function provides simple disconnection detection in combination with the input
220. larm setting window PROCESS ALARM DISABLE ENABLE Process alarm upper lower limit value window PRALARM LWR UPR 00000 Process alarm lower lower Averaging process setting window AVE PROCESSING SAMPL I NG TIME AVERAGE COUNT AVERAGE MOVING AVERAGE TIME LAG FILT LOW PASS FILT HIGH PASS FILT BAND PASS FILT LPF Pass band edge frequency window LPF PASS BAND 00000 BPF Pass band edge frequency Low window BPF PASS BAND L 00000 Attenuation band width window ATTENUATE BAND 00000 Process alarm upper upper limit value window PRALARM LWR LWR 00000 Process alarm lower upper limit value window PRALARM UPR LWR 15000 The change will be applied to the parameter PROCESS ALARM PRALARM UPR UPR PRALARM UPR LWR limit value window PRALARM LWR LWR PRALARM LWR UPR PRALARM LWR LWR RATE ALARM RATE ALARM TIME RATE ALARM UPR RATE ALARM LWR INPUT SIG ERR INPUT SIG VALUE SCALING SCALE UP LIMIT SCALE LOW LIMIT SHIFT DIGITALCLIP Channel selection window 184 00000 Rate alarm detection cycle window RATE ALARM TIME 00001 To the next page Rate alarm setting window RATE ALARM DISABLE ENABLE CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT From the previous page Rate alarm upper limit value window Rate alarm lower limit value window Input signal error setting window
221. leq Z xipueddy 61 Latest address of error history Un G1800 The latest address of error history is stored 62 Error history No 0 Un G1810 to Un G1969 Up to 16 errors that occurred in the module are recorded b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G1810 Error code Un G1811 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G1812 Month Day Un G1813 Hour Minute Un G1814 Second Day of the week Un G1815 System area Un G1819 Storage Item Storage contents 4 example First two digits of the year 20114 Last two digits of the year Month Day Stored in BCD code 3294 Hour Minute 10354 Second 404 One of the following values is stored for each day of the week in BCD code e Sunday 0 e Monday 1 Day of the week 24 e Tuesday 2 e Wednesday 3 e Thursday 4 Friday 5 e Saturday 6 4 Those are values when an error occurs at 10 35 40 on Tuesday March 29th 2011 63 CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 This area stores the logged data Up to 10000 data can be stored per channel After the 10001st data for CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 for each channel the logging is continued overwriting the data from the head For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function lt Page 130 Section 8 13 Point When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off the logging data in all the channels are cleared
222. ling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s l
223. ling cycle When A D conversion is disabled for CH1 to CH3 CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G13 is updated every 80us When A D conversion is enabled for CH1 and CH3 only CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G13 is updated every 40us 74 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS c Conversion cycle Digital output values are updated on the conversion cycle of sampling cycle time average count average moving average time lag filter low pass filter high pass filter or band pass filter The following table lists the conversion cycles of each A D conversion method A D conversion method Conversion cycle Sampling processing Sampling cycle Time average The time set to Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant x Sampling cycle Sampling cycle Count average The number set to Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant x Sampling cycle Moving average Sampling cycle Time lag filter Sampling cycle Low pass filter Sampling cycle High pass filter Sampling cycle Band pass filter Sampling cycle 4 Values after the decimal point are rounded off 15 poya UOISIeAUOD C V 48 2 Sampling processing The A D converter module executes the A D conversion of the analog input value sequentially and stores the digital output value to the buffer memory on the sampling cycle Ex The sampling cycle is
224. logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 is cleared to 0 273 sessaippy Alowe Jeng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 53 CHOO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1117 The address of buffer memory which stores the data of when a hold trigger a request to stop logging is executed can be checked in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 The difference between the address of buffer memory which stores the data of when a hold trigger a request to stop logging is executed and the start address in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 is stored For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 Ex When the value of CH2 Trigger pointer Un G1115 is 8550 CH2 Logging data Un G15000 Un G23550 priii f Un G24999 Data of when a trigger was executed 23550 15000 8550 Point When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is turned from ON 1 to OFF 0 CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un 1117 is cleared to 0 54 CHO Logging cycle monitor value Un G1122 to Un G1133 This area stores the actual logging cycle which is calculated from the update cycle of data to be logged When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off the logging cycle is stored in CHO Logging cycle monitor value Un G1122 to Un G1133 in the corresponding channel where the logging function is enabled For details
225. lowing two procedures e Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 e Turn on then off Error clear request YF 248 APPENDICES 16 Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 Whether the Process alarm is the upper limit warning or lower limit warning can be checked for each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO imit value CH4 upper imit value CH3 lower imit value CH3 upper imit value CH2 lower imit value CH2 upper imit value CH1 lower imit value CH1 upper imit value S 2 O Data for b8 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Normal 1 Alarm on a Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 status e When the value is out of the range specified in CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G101 Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 corresponding to each channel is turned to Alarm ON 1 e When a warning is detected in any A D conversion enable or process alarm output enable channels Warning output signal X8 also turns on b Clearing Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 e When the digital operation value returns within the setting range the flag is automatically cleared e When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off it is cleared 17 Warning output flag Rate alarm Un G51 Whether the Rate alarm is the upper limit warning or lower limit warning is checked for ea
226. lso do not use any use prohibited signals as an output signal from the programmable controller CPU to the intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system Design Precautions CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Do not install the analog signal cables together with the main circuit lines power cables or load cables of external devices other than the programmable controller Keep a distance of 150mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions WARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction Installation Precautions CAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the Safety Guidelines provided with the CPU module or head module Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To interconnect modules engage the respective connectors and securely lock the module joint levers until they click Incorrect interconnection may cause malfunction failur
227. lt value The default value is 0 All channels sessalppy Alowey Jeyng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 271 272 50 CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 The buffer memory address where the oldest data is stored can be checked in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 The difference between the buffer memory address where the oldest data is stored and the start address in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 is stored For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 Ex When the value of CH2 Head pointer Un G1091 is 8551 CH2 Logging data Un G15000 Latest data gt Un G23550 Un G23551 lt Oldest data 23551 15000 8551 Un G24999 Point The value in CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 is fixed to 0 since the oldest data is stored in the start address of CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 while the data of the first 10000 points is being logged from beginning of the logging After the 10001st data CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 increases one by one each time data is stored When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is turned from ON 1 to OFF 0 CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 is cleared to 0 APPENDICES 51 CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1101 The buffer memory address where the latest data is stored can be checked in CHO Logging data Un G500
228. lter constant of 20ms After 20ms from the analog input value becomes 1V the digital output value reaches 63 2 of the digital output value of when the sampling processing is selected poya UOISIAAUOD C V 8 Analog input value Digital output value 1 2 3840 1 0 3200 0 8 2560 Analog input value V 9 6 Z 1920 Digital output value 0 4 1280 0 2 640 0 0 9 29 Time ms 79 Digital output value of when the analog input value change forms a waveform containing ringing The following figure shows the change ratio of the digital output value with the input range of 0 to 10V and the moving average processing of 16 times under the following conditions Sampling cycle x Time lag filter constant Time constant 40ms Sampling cycle x Time lag filter constant Time constant 20ms e Moving average processing 16 times Analog input value Digital output value Time constant setting 20ms Digital output value Moving Digital output value Time constant setting 40ms average processing 16 times 1 2 3840 1 0 3200 2560 Digital output value 1920 0 8 Analog input value V 0 6 1280 0 4 0 2 640 0 Time ms 5 Digital filter When data is obtained from a sensor connected with the A D converter module the converted values may be output with unnecessary noise from the sensor This function removes noise by attenuating unnece
229. lue Set 0 to Level trigger condition setting The settings of the following items are not required Trigger data Trigger setting value Level data uonouny Bui6607 48 6u 660 do s 0 ysanbe e 126611 pjoy e Jo poyjyow Humes 9 E1 g 159 160 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable T Project window gt Intelligent Function Module lt gt module name gt Parameter ___Item Le ag He Pet H Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion enable disable setting O Enable 7 Averaging process setting 0 Enable Time Average Count 1 Disable Set Logging enable disable setting to 0 Enable Logging function Set logging function whe togging enable disable O Enable x Logging data setting 0 Enable Logging cycle setting value Set the target data in Logging data setting Logging enable disable setting 0 Enable 1 Logging data setting 1 Digital Operation x 1 Logging cycle setting value Digite Logging cycle unit specification 1 Digital Operation Value Set the cycle of storing logging data to Logging cycle setting value Logging cycle setting value 1000 ms Select a unit of Logging cycle setting value in Logging cycle unit specification togging cycle unit Logging points after trigger Hold trigger condition setting Trigger data Set Logging points after trigger to the number of the data points collected for the time peri
230. lue fits in A indicates that the alarm status is as follows i 10A 0 0 U limit of l Rate alarm Un G51 and Warning output signal ee ee PIA ERR X8 turn off automatically when the variation rate 1 Lower limit of a process alarm i Soi of the digital output value returns to the value 2 Upper limit of a rate alarm P f ie within the setting range at a rate alarm 3 Lower limit of a rate alarm i The alarm code can be cleared by turning on and off Error clear request YF after the digital output value returns to the value within the setting range An input signal error is occurring The channel where the input signal error has occurred fits in O A value fits in A indicates that the detection status is as follows The corresponding bit of Input signal error 1 Upper limit detection detection flag Un G49 and Input signal error 11A0 2 Lower limit detection detection signal XC turn off by turning on and off 3 Disconnection detection This alarm code is stored when an input signal error is detected according to the setting of the input signal error detection function Error clear request YF after the analog input value returns to the value within the setting range 226 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 6 Troubleshooting 1 When the RUN LED flashes or turns off a When flashing Check item Action Take either of the following actions e switch the operation mode setting in the intelligent function Is the operati
231. m area 53 354 Scaling enable disable setting 0000F R W 54 364 CH1 Digital operation value 0 R 55 374 CH2 Digital operation value 0 R w 56 38H CH3 Digital operation value 0 R 2 57 394 CH4 Digital operation value 0 R z 58 3AH 3 2 to to System area z 61 3Dy 3 62 3Ey CH1 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W S 63 3Fy CH1 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W 3 64 40h CH2 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W 65 414 CH2 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W 66 424 CH3 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W 67 434 CH3 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W 68 444 CH4 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W 69 454 CH4 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W 70 464 to to System area 85 554 86 564 CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W 87 574 CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W 88 584 CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W 89 594 CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W 33 Address Address 2 5 decimal hexadecimal Namig Default Read Write 90 5Ay CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W 91 5By CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W 92 5Cy CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W 93 5Dy CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W 94 5Ey CH3 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W 95 5SFuy CH3 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W 96 604 CH3 Process alarm upper
232. m jeuoxg y9 55 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS This chapter describes the setting procedures of the A D converter module Point After writing the setting of a new module parameters and auto refresh into the CPU module reset the CPU module switch STOP RUN gt STOP gt RUN or power off then on the module to validate the setting After writing the switch setting to the CPU module reset the CPU module or power off then on the module to validate the setting 7 1 Addition of Modules Add the model name of an A D converter module to use on the project 1 Addition procedure Open the New Module window W Project window gt Intelligent Function Module lt gt Right click lt gt New Module New Module m Module Selection Module Type Analog Module Module Name L60AD4 2GH x Mount Position v Mounted Slot No 0 Acknowledge I O Assignment IV Specify start XY address 0030 H 1 Module Occupy 16 points Title setting Title Item Description Module Type Set Analog Module Module Selection Module Name Select the name of the module to be connected Mounted Slot No Set the slot No where the module is connected Mount Position Specify start XY The start I O number hexadecimal of the module is set according to the address slot No Setting any start I O number is also possible Title setting Title Set any title 56 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETT
233. m lower upper limit value Un G87 Un G91 Un G95 Un G99 CHO Process alarm upper lower limit value Un G88 Un G92 Un G96 Un G100 CHO Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G89 Un G93 Un G97 Un G101 CHO Rate alarm detection cycle setting value Un G118 to Un G121 CHO Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 Un G128 Un G130 Un G132 CHO Rate alarm lower limit value Un G127 Un G129 Un G131 Un G133 CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G145 CHO LPF Pass band edge frequency Un G300 to Un G303 CHO HPF Pass band edge frequency Un G308 to Un G311 CHO BPF Pass band edge frequency Low Un G316 Un G318 Un G320 Un G322 CHO BPF Pass band edge frequency High Un G317 Un G319 Un G321 Un G323 CHO Attenuation band width Un G332 to Un G335 CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1027 CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 CHO Hold trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1085 CHO Loading interrupt enable disable setting Un G1200 to Un G1203 CHO Logging load points setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 APPENDICES When Operating condition setting completed flag X9 is off the A D conversion is not performed In t
234. me Average 2 Count Average 3 Moving Average 4 Primary Delay Filter 5 Low Pass Filter 6 High P ilter 7 Band Pass Filter Set Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant to an averaging processing value Averaging process setting Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant 1 Time Average 1000 ms Setting item Setting range Time average 2 to 5000ms Count average 4 to 65000 times Moving average 2 to 1000 times Time lag filter 1 to 500 times CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS c Low pass filter 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable T Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Parameter SSS ein Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion ii enable disable setting g i Averaging process setting 0 Enable Time Average Count 2 Set Averaging process setting to 5 Low Pass Filter Averaging process setting S Low Pass Filter zj Time Average Count 0 Sampling Processing Average Moving Average Time lag 1 Time Average filter constant 2 Count Average 3 Moving Average 4 Primary Delay Filter Digital filte setting 5 Low Pass Filter 6 High Pass Filter 7 Band Pass Filter 3 Set LPF Pass band edge frequency to a pass band edge frequency Low pass filter Set value for the Low LPF Pass band edge 4 Set Attenuation band width to an
235. me as No 1 1949 79Dy 1950 79E to to No 15 Same as No 1 1959 TATY 1960 TAB to to No 16 Same as No 1 1969 7B1y 1970 7B2y to to System area 4999 13874 4 The default value is a value set after power on or after resetting the CPU module 2 This shows whether whether reading the data from or writing the data to the area with programs is possible R Readable W Writable sesseippy Ajowepy yng Jo 3sI S E 43 3 Logging section Un G5000 to Un G49999 44 Address Address a decimal hexadecimal ae Default Read Write 5000 1388 to to CH1 Logging data 0 R 14999 3A97y 15000 3A98y to to CH2 Logging data 0 R 24999 61A74 25000 61A84 to to CH3 Logging data 0 R 34999 88B74 35000 88B8 to to CH4 Logging data 0 R 44999 AFC74 45000 AFC8 to to System area 49999 C34Fy The default value is a value set after power on or after resetting the CPU module 2 This shows whether whether reading the data from or writing the data to the area with programs is possible R Readable W Writable CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION This chapter describes the procedures before operation Start Module mounting Mount the A D converter module in any desired configuration Page 47 Section 5 1 Wiring Connects external devices to the A D converter L gt Page 53 Section 6 4 module NO Use user ra
236. n G1090 to Un G1093 Stores a number indicating the address where the latest data is stored in the logging data storage area for each channel The number is a count from the start address When 10000 points or less data are collected When data more than 10000 points are collected CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1101 ects Vv G 10000th data ne 10000th data L L s L ie 1 CHO Head pointer gt igi Ga the oldest 1st data oo 7 1 2nd data Pianeta aie 2nd data 1 T SN pak ahaa E a a 1 REA 3rd data CHO Latest pointer _ 3rddata 5 pA ae 4th data i 4th data g CHO Latest pointer i gt 5th data the latest Sennen eee ee eee 5th data the latest E s 6th data A RS T 6th data the oldest pul 9 ada tal ese caseahe 7 5 CHO Head pointer i i 3 i 9999th data a 9999th data o L CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 does not change until all the addresses of the logging data storage area are used after logging starts The value is fixed to 0 When all the addresses are filled the next uo eJado Bulbbo y Buiddoys z 1 g data is stored in the first address of the logging data storage area When the existing data is overwritten the value of CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 increases by one 149 b The number of logging data The number of valid loggi
237. n G35 Un G37 are reset by turning on then off Maximum value minimum value reset request YD gt Controlled by the A D converter module Controlled by the program Maximum value minimum value storage area Un G30 to Un G37 gt K Maximum value minimum value reset request YD Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD 8 A D conversion completed flag XE A D conversion completed flag XE turns on when all A D conversion enabled channels are converted 9 Error flag XF Error flag XF turns on when an error occurs gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program gt gt Latest error code Un G19 lt 55 Error gt lt 0 pp i Po a3 ON ii ages roan a gt o OAN OFF 5 Error flag XF EN Zg 1 So ON 2 2 p Ele Error clear request YF DEF O S a a Clearing the latest error code and Error flag XF Turn on then off Error clear request YF 237 Appendix 1 2 Output signal 238 1 Operating condition setting request Y9 To validate the following settings turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Un G1 to Un G4 Averaging process setting for the Q64AD Un G9 Averaging process setting Un G24 Input signal error detection set
238. n an instruction execution is failed END YOLS9O d v s xipueddy uoHonsjsu pa eoipaq G xipueddy 295 Appendix 6 Checking Serial Number and Function Version For details on how to check the serial number and function version refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual 296 APPENDICES Appendix T When Using GX Developer Appendix 7 describes the operating procedure when GX Developer is used 1 Compatible software version For the compatible software versions refer to the following LC MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Appendix 7 1 Operation of GX Developer A Configure the setting on the following window when using GX Developer Window name Application Reference I O assignment Set the type of module installed and the range of I O signal Page 297 Appendix 7 1 1 Switch setting Configure the switch setting of an intelligent function module Page 298 Appendix 7 1 2 Offset gain p setting Configure the setting when using the user range setting for the input range Page 65 Section 7 5 2 1 I O assignment Configure the setting from I O assignment in PLC parameter W Parameter gt PLC parameter gt I O assignment L parameter setting PLE name PLCsystem PLC file PLCRAS 1 PL
239. n be set for each channel Sampling processing e Averaging processing time average count average moving average Time lag filter e Digital filter low pass filter high pass filter band pass filter 1 Overview of A D conversion A D conversion is performed per two channels A D conversion is performed for CH1 and CH3 simultaneously then for CH2 and CH4 simultaneously a Conversion speed Conversion speed is the time taken for the A D converter module to convert analog input values into digital values b Sampling cycle Sampling cycle is the internal A D conversion cycle This cycle varies depending on the setting of the number of A D conversion enabled channels 3 Page 73 Section 8 3 The following table lists the sampling cycles depending on the setting of A D conversion enabled channels AID conversion enable disable setting for CH1 and CH3 A D conversion enable disable setting for CH2 and CH4 Sampling cycle Conversion enabled for CH1 or CH3 or both Conversion disabled for both channels 40us channels Conversion enabled for CH2 or CH4 or both Conversion disabled for both channels 40us channels Conversion enabled for CH1 or CH3 or both Conversion enabled for CH2 or CH4 or both 80us u channels channels Point A D conversion can be set whether to enable or disable for each channel Disabling the A D conversion for unused channels reduces the samp
240. n the input signal error detection function refer to the following e Input Signal Error Detection Function gt Page 96 Section 8 7 a Setting procedure The setting range is between 0 and 250 0 to 25 0 Set it in a unit of 1 0 1 e The input signal error detection upper and lower limit values are calculated as follows based on the input signal error detection setting value The calculated input signal error detection upper and lower limit values vary depending on the input range used Input signal error detection upper limit value i i Input signal error Gain value of Gain value of Offset value of s detection setting value each range each range each range 1000 Input signal error detection lower limit value Input signal error Lower limit value Gain value of 7 Offset value of x detection setting value of each range gt each range each range 4000 Ex When the input signal error detection setting value is set to 100 10 Range used 4 to 20mA The upper and lower limit values of input signal error detection are as follows Input signal error detection upper limit value 100 20 20 4 x 21 6mA 1000 i 100 Input Signal error lt 4 20 4 x 2 4mA detection lower limit value 1000 Conditions vary as follows depending on the setting in Input signal error detection setting Un G27 Input signal error detection setting Detection condition Un G27 f At the input sig
241. nal block fixing holes as a fulcrum and remove the terminal block b Installation procedure 1 Fully insert the projections on the top of the Terminal block fixing hole terminal block into the terminal block fixing holes N i and press the terminal block until it snaps into place 2 Open the terminal cover and tighten the terminal block mounting screw Terminal block mounting screw a P 51 yo0 g Jeuludsl 79 6 3 Wiring 1 Wiring to a terminal block The following figures show wirings to a terminal block a For the voltage input CH1 CH1 CH1 V V l CH1 l CH2 V cH2 cH2 V l CH2 ef FG CH3 V CH3 CH3 I CH4 v l CH4 FG TRG b For the current input CH1 V CH1 CH1 I CH2 V l CH2 e FC CH3 V CH3 CH3 I CH4 e v CH4 e FG TRG 52 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 4 External Wiring The following figures show the external wiring 1 For the voltage input Signal source 10 to 10V
242. nal error detection upper limit value or the input signal error Upper and Lower Detection 1 detection lower limit value Lower Detection 2 At the input signal error detection lower limit value Upper Detection 3 At the input signal error detection upper limit value In 2mA or less or 0 5V or less e The setting for CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Disconnection Detection 4 Un G145 is ignored Input range other than 4 to 20mA extended mode or 1 to 5V extended mode cannot be used b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is 5 50 All channels Point A channel where a value out of the above setting range is set brings about an error Error code 800 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on The operation is performed with the setting before the error 254 APPENDICES 25 CHO Shifting amount to conversion value Un G150 to Un G153 Set the shifting amount to conversion value used for the shift function for each channel The digital operation value to which the shifting amount to conversion value is applied is stored in CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 for each channel For details on the shift function refer to the following e Shift Function gt Page 117 Section 8 10 b15 b14 b1
243. nction Rate Alarm RATE ALARM Selection Rate alarm detect cycle time RATE ALARM TIME Numeric 32000 1 Rate alarm upper limit value RATE ALARM UPR Numeric 32767 32768 Rate alarm lower limit value RATE ALARM LWR Numeric 32767 32768 Input signal error detection function INPUT SIG ERR Selection Warning output function Rate Alarm INPUT SIG VALUE Numeric 250 0 Scaling function SCALING Selection Scaling upper limit value SCALE UP LIMIT Numeric 32000 32000 Scaling lower limit value SCALE LOW LIMIT Numeric 32000 32000 Shift function SHIFT Numeric 32767 32768 Digitalclip function DIGITALCLIP Selection 186 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT 2 A D conversion enable disable setting Select ENABLE or DISABLE in the A D CONVERSION window A D CONVERSION window 1 Use the A and Ww buttons to select ENABLE or DISABLE and confirm with the button 3 Averaging process setting In the AVE PROCESSING window select whether to perform sampling processing averaging processing time average count average moving average time lag filter or digital filter 1 Use the A and YW buttons to select the detection method from the following and confirm with the button e SAMPLING TIME AVERAGE e COUNT AVERAGE e MOVING AVERAGE TIME LAG FILTER e LOW PASS FILTER e HIGH PASS FILTER e BAND PASS FILTER AVE PROCESSING window 4 TIME COUNT MOV window 2 Move the cursor using the 4 and p butto
244. nction scaling function and shift function are used together refer to the following Setting example of when the digital clipping function scaling function and shift function are used together LF Page 124 Section 8 11 4 uooun4 HUS OLS 121 8 11 Digital Clipping Function This function fixes the range of the digital operation value with the maximum digital output value and the minimum digital output value when the corresponding current or voltage exceeds the input range 1 Concept of digital clipping setting The following table lists the output range of the digital operation value when the digital clipping function is enabled for each range Output range of the digital operation value Input range a T z ae 7 z Digital clipping function enabled Digital clipping function disabled 4 to 20mA 0 to 20mA 1 to 5V 0 to 32000 768 to 32767 0 to 5V 0 to 10V User range setting uni polar current 10 to 10V 32000 to 32000 32768 to 32767 User range setting bi polar voltage 4 to 20mA Extended mode 8000 to 32000 8768 to 32767 1 to 5V Extended mode 2 Setting procedure 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable W Project window gt Intelligent Function Module lt gt module name lt gt Parameter Item CH1 E Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion PF enable disable setting TEn hd Averaging process setting O Enable
245. ncy output from the test sensor Noise is removed and thus target data can be obtained gt Page 80 Section 8 4 5 19 1 2 2 20 Advantages with the main features Expensive devices for tests are not required by using the following functions of the module e Digital filtering function low pass filter high pass filter band pass filter Logging load detection function The digital filtering function low pass filter high pass filter band pass filter removes noise by attenuating unnecessary frequency data Thus target frequency data is obtained through digital output values output from a test sensor The logging load detection function enables more than 10000 points of logging data of the obtained data to be stored continuously at high speed conversion without stopping the logging operation Transferring logging data by using an interrupt program More than 10000 points of logging data can be stored by transferring the logging data to a device memory of the CPU module Device memory of the CPU module 1 to 1000th data M Logging is completed 1 to 1000th data Logging 1001 to 2000th data 2001 to 3000th data 3001 to 4000th data 4001 to 5000th data Waiting for logging 5001 to 6000th data 6001 to 7000th data 7001 to 8000th data 8001 to 9000th dat
246. nd pass filter a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Sampling processing 0 All channels Point When using Averaging process setting for the Q64AD Un G9 the value set in Averaging process setting Un G24 is ignored The operation is performed according to Averaging process setting for the Q64AD Un G9 In an operation with the A D conversion timing set to External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal or Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory the setting value is ignored and Sampling processing 0 is set Achannel where a value out of the above setting range is written operates with the sampling processing 245 sessalppy Alowey yng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 10 Input signal error detection setting Un G27 Set the detection method of input signal errors for each channel b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Detection method Setting value Disable Ou Upper and Lower Detection 1H Lower Detection 24 Upper Detection 3H Disconnection Detection 44 a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Disable 0 All channels Point A channel where a value out of the above setting range is set brings about an error
247. ng data in the logging data storage area can be checked with CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 When 10000 points or less data are collected When data more than 10000 points are collected L Y 1 Ree L A 1st data A 1 ist data Valid data 2nd data arnesses us anons ning 2nd data r 3rd data r Fd GEV Valid data H H e a ae Sis Ses aa ot Ath data i CHO Number of logging data 5 Ath data f si 5th data AEE E A EE ETT 5th data CHL Number of logging data 10000 6th data i A 6th data M5 i ae ee See a si l Invalid data 1 i 9999th data Data stored in this area is not reliable 9999th data i 10000th data Y 10000th data WV L The value of CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 increases by one every time a new data is stored When all the addresses of the logging data storage area are filled the next data is stored in the first address of the logging data storage area The logging operation continues overwriting the existing data c Checking data when a hold trigger a request to stop logging occurs The storage location of the data when a hold trigger a request to stop logging occurs can be checked with CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1117 Ex The value stored in CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1117 when the logging operation stops under the following conditions CHO Logging point
248. ng method of the logging cycle refer to The channel where the error has occurred fits in O the following Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 Set CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to a Un G1035 and CHO Logging cycle unit setting 7 Un G1040 to Un G1043 so that the logging cycle is a The set logging cycle is shorter than the update cycle of the equal to or longer than the update cycle of the O 20201 logged value digital output value or digital operation value logged value Q met 7 o The channel where the error has occurred fits in O For the setting method of the logging cycle refer to the following a Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1027 is set to a Set Digital output value 0 or Digital operation value 20301 value other than 0 and 1 1 in CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Un G1027 CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 is set Set a value within the range of 1 to 10000 in CHO 20401 to a value outside the range of 1 to 10000 Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Un G1051 Set one of the following values in CHO Hold trigger diti tting Un G1056 to Un G1059 CHO Hold trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 is Odltion setting Un ee f Logging hold request 0 A set to a value outside the range of 0 to 4 i
249. ng output flag Rate alarm D28 D13 CH3 Digital operation value MO CH1 A D conversion completed flag M1 CH2 A D conversion completed flag M2 CH3 A D conversion completed flag M3 CH4 A D conversion completed flag M20 to M27 Warning output flag Process alarm M30 to M37 Warning output flag Rate alarm M50 to M53 Input signal error detection flag M100 Module READY checking flag X40 Digital output value read command input signal X43 Input signal error detection reset signal LX40C6 X40 to X4F X44 Error reset signal Y50 to Y5F Error code notation BCD 4 digits LY42NT1P Y50 to Y5F uonesnByuo0y wa3s S puepuels e ul ajnpon eu Buis usu ZO 201 5 Program example when using the parameter of intelligent function module a Parameter setting Set the contents of initial settings in the parameter Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt L60AD4 2GH lt gt Parameter 0030 L60AD4 2GH Parameter Ly Nyy nN J E ET O Enable O Enable O Enable O Enable 0 Sampling Processing 2 Count Average 3 Moving Average 50 Times 10 Times 100 Times 1 Disable 0 Enable 1 Disable 20000 18000 3000 0 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable O Enable 320 Times 20 0 20 0 1 Upper and Lower Detection O Disable O Disable O Disable 10 0 202 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING b Auto refresh setting Project window Intelligent Function Module gt L60AD4 2GH lt gt Auto_Refresh 0030 L
250. nge settings Offset gain setting To use user range settings set the offset gain E Page 62 Section 7 5 values Programming and debugging Creates and checks a program 45 Memo 46 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter describes the overall configuration number of connectable modules and compatible software version of the A D converter module 5 1 Overall System Configuration The following figure shows system configuration examples for using the A D converter module 1 When connected to a CPU module Display unit optional I O module 3 or Power supply module CPU module A D converter module intelligent function module END cover INPUT 100 240vac PANN 50 60Hz 130VA OUTPUT 5VDC 5A 2 When connected to a head module I O module or Power supply module Head module A D converter module intelligent function module END cover uopens juon Wass eJ8AQ G SOADS 2GH mmm RUN ALM l ERR Power INPUT 00 2a0vac PAN 50 60Hz 130VA OUTPUT SVDC 5A S r8 as lene 7S aa aN 47 5 2 Applicable System 1 Number of connectable modules For the number of connectable modules refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection MELSEC
251. nge the value according to the processing method When the sampling processing is set to the channel to which the setting value has been set the setting value is ignored 240 APPENDICES 3 Averaging process setting for the Q64AD Un G9 Write the setting of averaging processing for each channel when using a program for initial setting of the Q64AD b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO o o Jo Jo fera enslenefem o o 0 o ernfenalenejcn D ef NO ey Averaging processing channel Time number of times specification specification 1 Averaging processing 1 Time 0 Sampling processing 0 Number of times a Enabling the setting To enable the setting turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 after setting Averaging process setting Un G24 to Sampling processing 0 Point When selecting the moving average write 0 to Averaging process setting for the Q64AD Un G9 and write the moving average setting to Averaging process setting Un G24 In an operation with the A D conversion timing set to External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal or Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory the setting value is ignored and Sampling processing 0 is set b Default value The default value is Sampling processing 0 All channels 241 sessalppy Alowey Jeyng jo sjleleq Z xipueddy 4 A D conversion completed flag Un G10 A D conve
252. nitor value 1 1 Indicates the address where the latest data is stored in the logging data storage area For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function lt gt Page 130 Section 8 13 a Default value The default value is 1 All channels 59 CHO Last logging load pointer Un G1224 to Un G1227 The this logging load pointer of when the previous pointer detection interrupt occurs is stored This area is used to detect overlap of the interrupt processing of logging load pointer detection For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function lt gt Page 130 Section 8 13 a Default value The default value is 1 All channels 60 CHO Logging load points monitor value Un G1232 to Un G1235 The value set in CHO Logging load points setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 is stored for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 130 Section 8 13 Point When a value whose integral multiple does not become 10000 is set for CHO Logging load points setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 the maximum value whose integral multiple is 10000 within the range set in CHO Logging load points setting value Un G1208 to Un G1211 is stored No values are stored in the channel where CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Disable 1 277 sessaippy Aiowel Jeng jo sjle
253. nnel number 2 Process alarm upper limit 3 Process alarm lower limit However digital conversion continues on the channel where a warning was output Operation after a warning was output When a digital operation value is smaller than the process alarm upper lower limit value or larger than the process alarm lower upper limit value and thus return to within the setting range after a warning is output 0 is stored to the corresponding channel number bit of Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 When digital output values in all the channels are within the setting range Warning output signal X8 turns off and the ALM LED turns off However alarm code 10 AD stored in Latest error code Un G19 is not cleared Turn on then off Error clear request YF to clear alarm code 10 AD Detection cycle When time average is specified the function works at every interval of the average time When count average is specified the function works at every average count When the sampling processing moving average the time lag filter the low pass filter the high pass filter or the band pass filter is specified the function works on the sampling cycle Target value for warning output CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 is the target value for process alarms Set values for CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G101 considering digital clipping scale conversion sh
254. non Beirut BG 1756 Sofia PT 3801 997 Aveiro Esgueira Phone 961 0 1 240 430 Phone 359 0 2 817 6000 Phone 351 0 234 303 900 Fax 961 0 1 240 438 Fax 359 0 2 97 44061 Fax 351 0 234 303 910 INEA RBT d 0 0 CROATIA Sirius Trading amp Services srl ROMANIA Losinjska 4a Aleea Lacul Morii Nr 3 HR 10000 Zagreb RO 060841 Bucuresti Sector 6 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE Phone 385 0 1 36 940 01 02 03 Phone 40 0 21 430 40 06 Fax 385 0 1 36 940 03 Fax 40 0 21 430 40 02 CBI Ltd SOUTH AFRICA AutoCont CS s r o CZECHREPUBLIC INEA RBT d o o SERBIA Private Bag 2016 Technologicka 374 6 zletnicka 10 Eh 160 Pango CZ 708 00 Ostrava Pustkovec SER 113000 Smederevo Phone 27 0 11 977 0770 Phone 420 595 691 150 Phone 381 0 26 615 401 a e AO eee Fax 420 595 691 199 Fax 381 0 26 615 401 Beijer Electronics A S DENMARK SIMAPs r o SLOVAKIA Lykkeg rdsvej 17 na Derku 1671 DK 4000 Roskilde SK 911 01 Trencin Phone 45 0 46 75 76 66 Phone 421 0 32 743 04 72 Fax 45 0 46 75 56 26 Fax 421 0 32 743 75 20 Beijer Electronics Eesti OU ESTONIA PROCONT spol s r o Pre ov SLOVAKIA P rnu mnt 160i K peln 1 A EE 11317 Tallinn SK 080 01 Presov Phone 372 0 6 51 81 40 Phone 421 0 51 7580 611 Fax 372 0 6 518149 Fax 421 0 51 7580 650 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND INEA RBT d 0 0 SLOVENIA Peltoie 37 Stegne 11 FIN 28400 Ulvila SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 358 0 207 463 540 Phone 386
255. not satisfying the formula of process alarm upper upper limit value gt process alarm upper lower limit value gt process alarm lower upper limit value gt process alarm lower lower limit value is set to a channel an error occurs in the channel Error code 6 AD is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on The operation is performed with the setting before the error Change the setting value since 0 is set as the default value When the following functions are used warning targets are digital operation values that reflect the operations of each function Set values considering operation results of each function e Digital clipping function Scaling function e Shift function Difference conversion function 252 APPENDICES 22 CHO Rate alarm detection cycle setting value Un G118 to Un G121 Set the cycle to check the change rate of digital output values for each channel The product of the setting value and the conversion cycle is the value for the cycle to detect the warning of a rate alarm a Setting range The setting range is between 1 and 32000 times b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is 1 time All channels Point A channel where a value out of the above setting range is set brings about an error Error code 710 is stored in Latest error co
256. ns then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and Y buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items smopul eBBueyo anjen Buas Jo IST 6 Input range Input item lt aan Input upper limit Input lower limit TIME 5000 2 COUNT 65000 4 MOV 1000 2 TIME LAG FILTER 500 1 Point A value between 0 and 65000 can be input for any type of averaging processing on the display unit However if the value is outside the setting range of the selected averaging processing an error occurs on the A D converter module side 187 4 LPF Pass band edge frequency Set the LPF Pass band edge frequency in the LPF PASS BAND window LPF PASS BAND window 1 Move the cursor using the q and gt buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items Input range Input item ae Aaa Input upper limit Input lower limit LPF PASS BAND 32767 0 5 HPF Pass band edge frequency Set the HPF Pass band edge frequency in the HPF PASS BAND window HPF PASS BAND window 1 Move the cursor using the lt q and gt buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items Input range Input item a rae Input upper limit Input lower limit HPF P
257. nsk MD 2060 Kishinev Phone 375 0 17 210 46 26 Phone 373 0 22 66 4242 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES Fax 375 0 17 210 46 26 Fax 373 0 22 66 4280 C SYSTEMS LTD EGYPT ESCO DRIVES amp AUTOMATION BELGIUM HIFLEX AUTOM TECHNIEK B V NETHERLANDS 93 Al Saad Al Alee St Culliganlaan 3 Wolweverstraat 22 EG Sarayat Maadi Cairo BE 1831 Diegem NL 2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone 20 0 2 235 98 548 Phone 32 0 2 717 6430 Phone 31 0 180 46 60 04 Fax 20 0 2 235 96 625 Fax 32 0 2 717 6431 Fax 31 0 180 44 23 55 5 LAN amp GAVISH Ltd ISRAEL Koning amp Hartman b v BELGIUM Koning amp Hartman b v NETHERLANDS 94 Shenkar St Kiryat Arie Woluwelaan 31 Haarlerbergweg 21 23 IL 49001 Petah Tiqva BE 1800 Vilvoorde NL 1101 CH Amsterdam Phone 972 0 3 922 18 24 Phone 32 0 2 257 0240 Phone 31 0 20 5877600 Fax 972 0 3 924 0761 Fax 32 0 2 257 02 49 Fax 31 0 20 587 76 05 GIRIT CELADON LTD ISRAEL INEA RBT d 0 0 BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY 12 H aomanut Street Aleja Lipa 56 Postboks 487 IL 42505 Netanya BA 71000 Sarajevo NO 3002 Drammen Phone 972 0 9 863 39 80 Phone 387 0 33 921164 Phone 47 0 32 243000 Fax 972 0 9 885 2430 Fax 387 0 33 524 539 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 CEG INTERNATIONAL LEBANON AKHNATON BULGARIA Fonseca S A PORTUGAL Cebaco Center Block A Autostrade DORA 4 Andrei Ljapchev Blvd PO Box 21 R Jo o Francisco do Casal 87 89 Leba
258. nt When the mode is switched from the offset gain setting mode to the normal mode Module READY X0 turns off then on Note the initial setting process is performed at the switching of the mode if a sequence program executes the initial setting when Module READY X0 turns on When the mode is switched from the offset gain setting mode to the normal mode the A D converter module operates under the previous operating condition 3 Errors 286 The instruction has no errors 4 Program example APPENDICES The following shows the program of the A D converter module installed in I O number X Y10 to X Y1F with the following conditions e turning on M10 switches the operation mode to the offset gain setting mode and e turning off M10 restores the operation mode to the normal mode Switches to the offset gain setting mode M10 tt Mov K1 D1 G OFFGAN U1 D1 X1A Processing in offset gain setting mode Switches to the normal mode Me MOV KO D1 X1A G OFFGAN U1 D1 r A _ _ gt Y gt Y_ii lt q xcq Processing in normal mode END Stores the setting data of the J dedicated instruction G OFFGAN in D1 J Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN Stores the setting data of the dedicated instruction G OFFGAN in D1 J Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN 287 NY9440 d Z S xipuaddy uoHonsjsu pa eoipaq G xipueddy App
259. ocal overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 305 Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation The SD logo and SDHC logo are trademarks All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 306 SH NA 081103ENG A MELSEC L Dual Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual MopeL L60AD4 2GH U E MODEL 13JZ
260. od from a hold trigger a request to stop logging occurrence to logging stop Logging points after trigger 10000 Select a condition of a hold trigger a request to stop logging in Hold trigger condition setting When Hold trigger condition setting is set to either 0 Logging hold request or 4 Outside trigger skip the procedure 8 to 10 Hold trigger condition setting 1 Rise Trigger data Trigger setting value 1 Rise Loading interrupt enable disable 2 Fall setting 3 Rise Fall AE 4 External Trigger anniina Inad nainte cettina walie CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 Set an address of the buffer memory monitored to Trigger data I Trigger data 54 To monitor a device value of a module other than the A D converter module such as a device of the CPU module set a value between 1072 and 1081 9 When Trigger data is set to a value between 1072 and 1081 transfer refreshed values of the monitored device to Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 one after another The following is an example of use of Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 Ex A program used to monitor the data register D100 of the CPU module and generate a CH1 level trigger Set CH1 Trigger data Un G1064 to 1073 Level data 1 This program is used to write refreshed values in D100 to Level data 1 Un G1073 on after another the head I O No is set to 104 in the following program example x10 Y19 X19 UN MOV D100 G1073 10 set T
261. odule User s Manual e Safety Guidelines This manual is included with the CPU module or head module The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 Additional measures No additional measures are necessary for the compliance of this product with EMC and Low Voltage Directives RELEVANT MANUALS 1 CPU module user s manual Manual name lt Manual number model code gt Description MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection lt SH 080890ENG 13JZ36 gt Specifications of the CPU modules power supply modules display unit branch module extension module SD memory cards and batteries information on how to establish a system maintenance and inspection and troubleshooting MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals lt SH 080889ENG 13JZ35 gt Functions and devices of the CPU module and programming 2 Head module User s Manual Manual name lt Manual number model code gt Description MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual lt SH 080919ENG 13JZ48 gt Specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings and troubleshooting of the head module 3 Operating manual Manual name lt Manual number model code gt Description GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual
262. ogramming condition This program reads digital output values enabled for A D conversion at CH1 to CH4 in the A D converter module CH3 deals with the digital operation value CH1 executes sampling processing CH2 executes averaging processing every 50 times CH3 converts analog values into digital values per 10 moving averages and CH4 converts analog values into digital values through the time lag filter with a time constant of 8ms If an error occurs in the module an error code is indicated in BCD 198 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 3 Switch setting Set the input range the operation mode and the A D conversion timing Project window Intelligent Function Module gt L60AD4 2GH gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0030 L60AD4 2GH Input Range Setting 4 4 to 20mA4 4 to 20mA4 4 to 20mA4 Drive Mode Setting Normal AJD Converter Processing Mode AJD Converter Timing Normal Internal Scan This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value ma uoneinByuoD WeaysXks psepue s e ul jnpow ey Bulsq uayMm ZOL 199 200 4 Initial setting a Channel setting Description Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable Enable Enable Enable Averaging process settin
263. ollected Time 154 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 1 Condition setting Select one of the following three conditions that generate a hold trigger a request to stop logging For the setting method of a hold trigger a request to stop logging refer to the following e Setting method of a hold trigger a request to stop logging gt Page 159 Section 8 13 6 a The condition setting of a level trigger Setting as Description value Above 1 Stored valle of a device Logging stops under the condition a A Below 2 Trigger Logging stops under the condition b setting value Time a Ahold trigger a request to stop logging is generated when the relation between the values changes from Stored value of a device to be monitored lt Trigger setting value to Pass through Logging stops under the condition a Stored value of a device to be monitored gt Trigger setting 3 h or b value b A hold trigger a request to stop logging is generated when the relation between the values changes from Stored value of a device to be monitored gt Trigger setting value to Stored value of a device to be monitored lt Trigger setting value b Trigger data Set the address of the buffer memory monitored Item Setting range CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 0 to 4999 To monitor a device value of a module other than the A D converter module such as a devic
264. on mode setting in the offset gain setting mode module switch setting to the normal mode or correct Switch 4 in the intelligent function module switch setting to switch the operation mode setting to the normal mode b When turning off Check item Action Check that the supply voltage of the power supply module is within the rated range Is the power supplied Calculate the current consumption of the connected modules such Is the capacity of the power supply module enough as the CPU module I O module and intelligent function module and check that the power supply capacity is sufficient Reset the CPU module and check that the RUN LED turns on Is there any watchdog timer error If the RUN LED remains off the module may be failed Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Is the module connected properly Check the module connection BHunooysejqnoi 9 4 227 2 When the ERR LED turns on or flashes a When turning on Check item Action Does any error occur Check the error code and take the action described in the error code list Error Code List 3 Page 221 Section 11 4 b When flashing Check item Action Is the value other than 0 set for Switch 5 in the intelligent function module switch setting With the parameter setting set O for Switch 5 in the intelligent function module switch setting 3 When the ALM LE
265. on module Is Operating condition setting request Y9 performed Check that the digital output value is stored in CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G14 after turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 When the problem has been solved check the program again Are the V and I terminals connected if the input source is current Always connect the V and I terminals for current input as shown in the external wiring example Are the setting values correct when the averaging processing is specified When selecting the time average processing set the values that satisfy the following condition e Setting value gt 4 times x sampling cycle If the condition above is not satisfied digital output values remain 0 Point If digital output values cannot be read even after the above actions are taken the A D converter module may be failed Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 5 When A D conversion completed flag does not turn on in the normal mode Check item Action Is there any input signal error Check Input signal error detection flag Un G49 6 When a digital output value does not fall within the range of accuracy Check item Action Is any measure against noise taken Take measures against noise such as using a shielded cable for connection 229 Bunooysejqnoi 9 4 7 When the input signal
266. onversion value 0 R W 34 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Address F decimal hexadecimal ome Default Read Write 153 994 CH4 Shifting amount to conversion value 0 R W 154 Ay to to System area 157 9Dy 158 9Ey Mode switching setting 0 R W 159 OF 1 160 AOp A D conversion timing monitor value 0 R 161 Aly Inside trigger conversion request 0 R W 162 A24 Trigger conversion completed flag 0 R 163 A3y Trigger conversion completed clear request 0 R W 164 A4y to to System area 171 ABy 172 ACy CH1 Difference conversion trigger 0 R W 173 ADy CH2 Difference conversion trigger 0 R W 174 AEy CH3 Difference conversion trigger 0 R W 175 AFy CH4 Difference conversion trigger 0 R W 176 BO to to System area 179 B3y 180 B4y CH1 Difference conversion reference value 0 R 181 B54 CH2 Difference conversion reference value 0 R 182 B64 CH3 Difference conversion reference value 0 R 183 B74 CH4 Difference conversion reference value 0 R 184 Bay to to System area 189 BDy 190 BEy CH1 Difference conversion status flag 0 R 191 BFy CH2 Difference conversion status flag 0 R 192 Coy CH3 Difference conversion status flag 0 R 193 Cty CH4 Difference conversion status flag 0 R 194 C24 to to System area 199 C74 200 C84 Pass data classification setting 0000 R W 201 C94 System area 202 CAy CH1 Industria
267. ored stored_ 1 Interrupt pointer 160 A program set as the interrupt M10 pointer operates 160 I Logging data in the buffer p memory are stored to the register A When the interrupt processing occurs first time B When the interrupt processing occurs second time C When the interrupt processing occurs third time 142 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 6 Setting procedure 1 Setting of interrupt pointers Assign the interrupt causes SI of the A D converter module and interrupt pointers of the CPU module with the intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting of the programming tool gt Page 137 Section 8 13 1 1 2 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable Project window gt Intelligent Function Module lt gt module name gt Parameter eee Item 24 CHi H Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion i enable disable setting 0 Enable zi Averaging process setting 0 Enable Time Average Count 3 Set Logging enable disable setting to 0 Enable Logging function Set logging function whe Logging enable disable O Enable x Logging data setting Logging cycle setting value u Disable 4 Setthe target data in Logging data setting Logging enable disable setting O Enable 1 Logging data setting 1 Digital Operation vil Logging cycle setting value O Digital Output
268. ored in CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 If a value is set to the shift amount to conversion value the shifting amount to conversion value is added regardless of turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 uoHOUNY HUS OLS 117 118 2 Setting procedure 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable XD Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Parameter Item CH1 E Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion eao in enable disable setting Dimai R Averaging process setting 0 Enable Time Average Count 2 Seta value to Shifting amount to conversion value E Shift function Set shift function whe ee amount to conversion 10000 Item Setting range Shifting amount to conversion value 32768 to 32767 Point If the digital output value exceeds the range of 32768 to 32767 as a result of shift addition the digital output value is fixed to the lower limit value 32768 or the upper limit value 32767 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Setting example When the following values are used for a channel with an input range of 10 to 10V e Shifting amount to conversion value 16000 The following figure and table show the values stored in CH1 Digital output value Un G11 and CH1 Digital Shift function Set shift function whe Shifting amount to conversion wep 16000 operation value Un G54 2 Digita
269. ot Page 74 Section 7 14 Sian xY Specify a start VO number for each slot Page 74 Section 7 1 5 Saka sairo Configure the switch setong of the builtin 10 or inteligent function modules PageT4 Secton7 18 ff Set the folowing P g 7 Error Time Output Mode gs mwaj PLC Operation Mode at HW Eror atai i O Response Time 2 F Setting Start X Y enables modification on the start O numbers assigned to connected modules jhen 1000 is specified in Start X Y to the slot where a 16 point module is connected the assignment range of an input module is changed to X1000 to X100F For details refer to the following CA WWELSEC L CPU Module Users Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Point Set the type of the connected module in Type Setting a different type results in SP UNIT LAY ERR int t Par Went function module the I O points must also be the same in addition to the I O assignment seting lt gt Page 30 Section 4 2 2 When an intelligent module is connected VO assignment can be omitted by selecting connected modules from Intelligent Function Module in the Project window 73 4 The mouse operation example is provided below For GX Works2 Menu bar XZ Online gt Write to PLC Select Online on the menu bar and then select Write to PLC A window selected in the view selection area is displayed XW Project window 5 gt Parameter lt gt P
270. output values from A D conversion can be collected through the high speed continuous logging In addition the logging load detection function enables the A D converter module to transfer logging data stored in the buffer memory of the module to the file register of a CPU module without stopping the logging operation The transfer enables more than 10000 points of logging data to be stored Workpiece Sensor for the inspection Tire geometry inspection Device memory of Transfer the CPU module e 1 VL 60AD4 2GH 1 to 1000th data Loggingis p completed 7 to 1000th data a Logging 1001 to 2000th data Transferring 100000 points 1 2001 to 3000th data of logging data by using r 3001 to 4000th data DS an interrupt program a 100000 4001 to 5000th data y Mh LJ ee points E Waiting for 5001 to 6000th data a logging 6001 to 7000th data a 7001 to 8000th data i 8001 to 9000th data 1 9001 to 10000th data ie BEeeae 18 CHAPTER 1 A D CONVERSION MODULE 2 Digital filtering function Unnecessary components of a frequency in a signal can be removed A low pass filter a high pass filter or a band pass filter can be selected as a digital filter fe Waves containing direct current low frequency mid frequency and high frequency Direct current
271. ple disconnection detection can ea ae i be executed The A D converter module stores the maximum and minimum values of ate y the digital operation values for each channel to the buffer memory Page 95 Maximum value minimum value hold function E The maximum and minimum values of channels with the averaging Section 8 6 processing specified are also stored to the buffer memory 29 Item Description Reference This function detects the analog input value which exceeds the setting range Page 96 Input signal error detection function a Ae STS The upper lower limit detection upper limit detection lower limit Section 8 7 detection and disconnection detection can be executed This function outputs a warning when a digital operation value enters the Page 102 Process alarm f Warning output preset range Section 8 8 1 function Rae This function outputs a warning when a change rate of a digital output Page 105 ate alarm value exceeds the setting range Section 8 8 2 This function enables scale conversion on the output digital values The values are converted within the range of the set scaling upper limit value Page 110 Scaling function y nee i and scaling lower limit value This omits the programming for scale Section 8 9 conversion This function adds the set shifting amount to conversion value to the Page 117 Shift function digital operation value and stor
272. pling frequency edge frequency Attenuation frequency band width dB i i o i e Performed every sampling cycle conversion cycle 2 e This filter attenuates frequency signals between a High pass filter i pass band edge frequency and the pass band edge high frequency pass 2 i PES i frequency an attenuation band width cutting off H enuation filter lt Stop band 3 band 2 Pass band 1 frequency signals lower than the attenuation band duh The target frequency of the filtering should be the 53 I A 4 7 ear pace hand TIHz same as or lower than 1 2 of Sampling frequency frequency edge frequency Attenuation band width 4B j Attenuation Attenuation e Performed every sampling cycle conversion cycle A band band 0 C2 1 Both a low pass filter low frequency pass filter and a ba c t 1 1 r i Band pass filter 2 Stop high pass filter high frequency pass filter are set z Ei i 1 1 band uh band frequency 5o i i 1 3 simultaneously As a result only frequency within a 9 pass filter ze i Attenuation specified bandwidth passes this filter 2 band width band width i 2 53 e The target frequency of the filtering should be the a 0 Pass band Pass band Passband Pass band f Hz A 4 2 edge edge edge edge same as or lower than 1 2 of Sampling frequency frequency Low frequency frequency frequency High Attenuation Low High Attenuation 2 band width band wid
273. processing for the scan where the G P OGSTOR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing END END END END processing processing processing processing Program pm G P OGSTOR OFF instruction ON G P OGSTOR instruction w ON Completion device ____ __1__ ON Execution failed Completion status ORR OFF Execution succeeded indication device 1 i 1 scan 4 Errors In the following cases an error occurs and an error code is stored in a completion status area 1 Error code Description of operation error 161 The G P OGSTOR instruction is executed in offset gain setting mode 162 The G P OGSTOR instruction is continuously executed The G P OGSTOR instruction is executed to the model different from the one to which the G P OGLOAD instruction is executed e The G P OGSTOR instruction has been executed before the execution of the G P OGLOAD instruction 163 294 APPENDICES 5 Program example The following shows the programs to write the offset gain setting value to the A D converter module which is installed in I O number X Y10 to X Y1F by turning off M11 Sets a control data M11 t SET M13 Restores a offset gain setting value Mis Dedicated instruction LGP OGSTOR ui D100 M30 3 GP OGSTOR M30 M31 A RST M13 M30 M31 7 Se Processing whe
274. r conversion completed flag Un G162 is Conversion completed 1 Trigger conversion request is accepted and digital output values and digital operation values are updated Trigger conversion request A D conversion Digital operation value Conversion Trigger conversion completed 1 completed flag Un G1 62 Waiting for the completion 0 OFF OFF ON Controlled by Por the A D converter module a K A D conversion is performed even if Trigger conversion completed flag is on Waiting for A D trigger input conversion A D Iconversion Waiting for trigger input Waiting for trigger input First conversion value Second conversion value OFF 167 uo ouny UOISI9AUOD JOBBuUL pL g 168 b Method of the trigger conversion completed clear request e To use Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 as an interlock for when External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal is set in A D Conversion Timing in Switch Setting an interval between Trigger conversion requests is required considering the scan time Set the interval between Trigger conversion requests about 5 times as long as the sequence scan time e To use Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 as an interlock for when Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory is set in A D Conversion Timing in Switch Setting turn on Trigger conversion
275. re refreshed every conversion cycle For the conversion cycle refer to the following e Conversion cycle gt Page 75 Section 8 4 1 c For the buffer memory address where the values are stored refer to the following e List of Buffer Memory Addresses lt Page 32 Section 3 5 1 Resetting the maximum value and the minimum value The maximum value and the minimum value are refreshed with present values by turning on then off Maximum value minimum value reset request YD e The maximum value and the minimum value are refreshed with digital operation values by turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 2 Target value for maximum value and minimum value The maximum and minimum values of digital operation values are stored in the buffer memory For details refer to the following e Processing Each Function gt Page 71 Section 8 2 uoNOUNY ploy anjena WnuwiuIW enjeA WNuIxey 9 g 95 8 7 Input Signal Error Detection Function This function detects an analog input value which exceeds a setting range Detected Not detected o Included Analog input value Input signal error detection upper limit value CH1 Analog input y value Normal input value Input signal error detection lower limit value Time CH1 Input signal error detection flag Un G49 b0 OFF ON Input signal error detection signal XC OFF ON CH1 A D conversion completed f
276. ribed in the following section to the CPU module e Error Code List gt Page 221 Section 11 4 e Alarm Code List gt Page 226 Section 11 5 220 11 4 Error Code List CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING If the following errors occur on the A D converter module while data is written to or read from the CPU module the corresponding error code below is stored in Latest error code Un G19 The error is reported to the CPU module also Error code ae i decimal Description and cause of error Action ecima The input range is set with a value outside the setting range for 7 i Set a valid value on the intelligent function module 100 Switch 1 of the intelligent function module switch setting wed f ot Nes switch setting in the parameter setting The channel with the invalid setting fits in O Power off and on the module If the error occurs again a failure might have 111 A hardware failure has occurred on the module occurred on the module Please consult a local Mitsubishi representative 412 A value other than 0 is set to Switch 5 on the intelligent function Set 0 to Switch 5 on the intelligent function module module switch setting switch setting in the parameter setting Check the digital output value 113 1 The data in the flash memory has a problem If there is a problem of the digital output value please consult a local Mitsubishi representative Start over the of
277. rigger setting value to a value which causes a level trigger I Trigger setting value 1000 161 uonouny Bui6607 48 6u 660 do s 0 ysanbe e 126611 pjoy e Jo poyjyow Humes 9 E1 g 8 14 Trigger Conversion Function 162 This function converts analog values into digital values according to the input of Trigger conversion request Trigger conversion request has two types External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal and Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory Point The A D converter module converts analog values into digital values in all the channels where A D conversion is enabled every time Trigger conversion request External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal and Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory is input However the module does not execute A D conversion when Trigger conversion request is not input 1 Definition of terms Trigger conversion request is the generic term for External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal and Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal and Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 represent different requests The generic term for trigger input is Trigger conversion request OFF gt ON The generic terms for each request are shown below e For External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal No external trigger reques
278. rocessing when a warning occurs M23 i Processing when a warning occurs Rate alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence X30 MOV D19 K2M30 M36 Ni Processing when a warning occurs M37 I Processing when a warning occurs Input signal error defection status and processing at error detection X30 MOV D8 K1M50 M50 poss rocessing when an input signal error is detecte P i hi i ignal is d d X43 X3C i SET Y3F Error code display and reset processing X3F BCD D10 K4Y50 X44 E LSET Y3F Y3F X3C X3F E WF ae RST _Y3F END 204 error is detected JTurns on input signal error reset signal Outputs the error code in BCD Turns on Error clear request Turns off Error clear request CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 6 Program example when not using the parameter of intelligent function module Initial X30 If SET settings M100 Y39 X39 r n MOV HO MOV K50 Rov KAO MOV K100 MOV H4320 MOV H70D MOV KO MOV K3000 MOV K18000 MOV K20000 MOV K320 MOV K200 MOV K 200 ov dH MOV K100 MOV HOB MOV KO MOV K32000 MOV HOB MOV K10000 SET RST yo yo y9 L 1T 1 I Yt LRST M100 U3 Go U3 G2 U3 G3 U3 G4 U3 G24 U3 G48 U3 G90 U3 G91 U3 G92 U3 G93 U3 G121 U3 G132 U3 G133 U3 G27 U3 G142 U3 G53 U3 G66 U3 G67
279. rolled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 OFFO X ONG ae eal ONC N Trigger condition Unestablished X Established x Unestablished 1 a 1 oN 1 tj Cai N CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 Logging status Logging After logging resumes set CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 to ON 1 a Buffer memory status when logging resumes Refer to the following L gt Page 153 Section 8 13 3 3 a CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 13 5 Logging outside trigger A hold trigger a request to stop logging is generated when an outside trigger is detected To use a logging outside trigger CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 must be set to ON in advance When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is set to ON 1 the trigger condition waits for itself being satisfied The logging stops when the specified number of data started to be logged at the detection of the trigger with CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 is finished being collected Logging hold processing starts for all the channels where CHO Hold trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 is set to Outside trigger 4 For specification on the input voltage and current of the external input terminal refer to the following e Performance Specifications gt Page 26 Section 3 2
280. rrence Processing when a warning occurs ca rate alarm upper limit value Ma7 Byocascind whenia wamingoecurs CH4 Processing at the warning occurrence g 9 rate alarm lower limit value Input signal status and processing at input signal error detection X1000 F mov wi008 KiM50 Reads Input signal error detection flag M50 Processing when an input signal error is detected CH1 Processing at the input signal error detection x23 ae Turns on Error clear request to reset the SET Y100F J input signal error Error code display and reset processing X100F BCD w1010 K4Y30 Outputs the error code in BCD X24 tt SET Y100F Turns on Error clear request Y100F X100C X100F RST Y100F Turns off Error clear request MCR NO END 216 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes errors that may occur in the use of the A D converter module and those troubleshooting 1 Checking for the error codes and alarm codes Errors and alarms that occurred in the A D converter module can be checked by any of the following methods Choose the checking methods for the purpose and application e Checking on the Module Detailed Information gt Page 218 Section 11 1 e Checking by Latest Error Code Un G19 L gt Page 219 Section 11 2 e Checking on the module error collection function gt Page 220 Section 11 3 e Checkin
281. rsion status can be checked with this flag b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO olo Jo fofofofofo olfofo o enfensjenzjcn ee a ee Data for b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 1 Conversion completed 0 During conversion or unused a A D conversion completion When the first A D conversion is completed in the channel where the A D conversion is enabled the flag turns to Conversion completed 1 A D conversion completed flag XE turns on when the conversion of all the channels where the A D conversion is enabled are completed Turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 turns the flag to 0 default value and the flag turns to Conversion completed 1 when the first A D conversion is completed Ex When Enabled is set to CH1 and CH2 and all the A D conversions in CH1 and CH2 are completed 0003 3 is stored in A D conversion completed flag Un G10 as shown below b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO fo fofojofojofofofofofofojofo 1 i CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 0 0 0 3 5 CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G14 The A D converted digital output value is stored in 16 bit signed binary b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO fe eee el he a J Data section Sign bit 1 Negative 0 Positive a Updating cycle For the conversion cycle refer to the following e Conversion cycle lt gt Page 75 Section 8 4 1 c 6 Latest error code Un G19 T
282. rsion value for CH2 76 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Averaging processing The A D converter module performs averaging processing on the digital output values and stores the average values to the buffer memory The following processing is provided for averaging processing Time average Count average e Moving average a Time average The A D converter module executes the A D conversion for set time and stores the average of the total value excluding the maximum and the minimum values to the buffer memory The processing count in the setting time varies depending on the sampling cycle Number of Set time processing Sampling cycle Ex The processing count for the following settings is calculated below Item Setting Number of channels used the number of channels set to 4 channels CH1 to CH4 A D conversion enabled Setting time 15ms 15 0 08 187 5 times Values after the decimal point are omitted Conversion is processed 187 times and the averaged value is output Point The valid lower limit setting value for the time average is calculated by minimum processing count of 4 x sampling cycle When 4 maximum channels are used 80us x 4 320uUs b Count average The A D converter module executes the A D conversion for set time and stores the average of the total value excluding the maximum and the minimum values to the buffer memory The time taken for storing the co
283. s after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 6505 points The data that causes a hold trigger a request to stop logging 3500th data Vv ist data sieceenceemaceeoeeceeceecs 2nd data 3rd data i 4th data E EE 5th data Latest data O I O r v D n 2 gej o D 5 a 6th data Oldest data i 3499th data Pree errr errr nn 3500th data CHOTrigger pointer 3500 3501st data KA O L O ae D D rom ae 5 S D eee 9999th data 10000th data 150 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS d Checking trigger detection time The trigger detection time can be checked with CHO Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1169 Even when the logging cycle is set to a period less than 1s the minimum time unit recorded in CHO Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1169 is second Use trigger detection time as an indication to refer to the logging data Ex When CH1 Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1157 is monitored b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G1154 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G1155 Month Day Un G1156 Hour Minute Un G1157 Second Day of the week e First two digits of the year last two digits of the year month day hour minute and second are all stored in the BCD code e In Day of the week segment one of the following values in the BCD code indicating the corresponding day is stored
284. s at a maximum An address where the latest data is stored can be checked with the latest pointer An address where the oldest data is stored can be checked with the head pointer or Digital output value digital operation value 130 Lonnmeeeee y 1st data 2nd data 3rd data gt 4th data vyv Logging 5th data cycle 6th data 9999th data 10000th data ee a A aon Head pointer The address of the oldest logging data can be checked Latest pointer The address of the latest logging data can be checked Logging data are stored in buffer memory areas The data are overwritten from the 1st data area when the 10000 points of data maximum amount of data the memory can store are stored CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b Stopping logging Logging can be stopped by the following operations Since the data after a hold trigger a request to stop logging occurs a trouble occurs can be saved the data of the trouble cause can be quickly specified C Page 148 Section 8 13 2 e The status change in data is used as a trigger Logging stops at a hold trigger to save the data after the trigger occurred One of the following three signals can be selected as a hold trigger a request to stop logging Combination is not available e Logging hold request e Level trigger e Logging outside trigger The number of logg
285. s can be used l Link direct Intelligent Sxi Internal device e device ani dul Index etting system user e unction mo ule rer Constant Others data register JDO device 3 3 Bit Word Bit Word unico X Y M L T ST C D a Applicable SM F B W SD Ppp i R ZR z uoco Zz K H E N BL device SB FX SW FD a TR BLS FY o V 4 For details on each device refer to the following 1 MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 2 FX and FY can be used for bit data only and FD for word data only 33 In the Constant and Others columns a device s that can be set for each instruction is shown e The following data types can be used Data type Description Bit Bit data or the start number of bit data BIN 16 bit 16 bit binary data or the start number of word device BIN 32 bit 32 bit binary data or the start number of double word device BCD 4 digit Four digit binary coded decimal data BCD 8 digit Eight digit binary coded decimal data Real number Floating point data Character string Character string data Device name Device name data 15 TERMS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Term Description A D converter module Another term for the MELSEC L series dual channel isolated high resolution analog digital converter module Head module The a
286. scription Reference Set whether to enable or disable A D conversion for each channel Page 73 A D conversion enable disable function Disabling the A D conversion for unused channels reduces the aie 33 i conversion cycles The A D converter module executes the A D conversion of the analog Page 76 Sampling processing input value sequentially and stores the digital output value to the buffer Section 8 4 memory 2 The A D converter module executes the A D conversion for set time and Time stores the average of the total value excluding the maximum and the Page 77 i eae oe minimum values to the buffer memory The number of processing time Section 8 4 Vi 9 within the setting time changes depending on the number of channels 3 a used the number of channels set to A D conversion enabled The A D converter module executes the A D conversion for set time and stores the average of the total value excluding the maximum and the Page 77 Averaging Count a i minimum values to the buffer memory Time for the count average value Section 8 4 processing average stored in the buffer memory changes depending on the used channel 3 b numbers the number of channels set to A D conversion enabled AD conversion The A D converter module averages digital output values of set number method Nevin of times which are measured every sampling cycle and stores them in Page 78 vi ae the buffer memory Since the averaging processing is perform
287. setting in the parameter setting DEC n old error The latest error is displayed at he bottom line i error history is sequentially displayed from Stop Monitor 174 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 18 Saving and Restoring Offset gain Values The offset gain value of the user range setting uni polar current and user range setting bi polar voltage can be saved and restored in the A D conversion module In the event that the A D converter module fails and needs to be replaced the offset gain values of the failed A D converter module can be restored onto the replaced A D converter module In addition if multiple A D converter modules are connected on a system the offset gain settings in one of the modules can be applied to the other modules However if the offset gain values are saved and restored the accuracy after the restoration decreases by approximately three times compared to that before the restoration Reconfigure the offset gain when required sone uleBAesyO Bunozs y pue Bunes 91 g 175 1 Procedure for saving and restoring offset gain values a To restore offset gain values onto a new replaced module 1 Save the offset gain values 2 Replace the A D converter module 3 Restore the offset gain values 176 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b To apply the offset gain values set in one module to the other modules in
288. shipment setting offset value L System 5 CH1 Industrial shipment setting offset value H System 6 CH1 Industrial shipment setting gain value L System 7 CH1 Industrial shipment setting gain value H System 8 CH2 Industrial shipment setting offset value L System 9 CH2 Industrial shipment setting offset value H System 10 CH2 Industrial shipment setting gain value L System 11 CH2 Industrial shipment setting gain value H System 12 CH3 Industrial shipment setting offset value L System 13 CH3 Industrial shipment setting offset value H System 14 CH3 Industrial shipment setting gain value L System 15 CH3 Industrial shipment setting gain value H System 16 CH4 Industrial shipment setting offset value L System 17 CH4 Industrial shipment setting offset value H System 18 CH4 Industrial shipment setting gain value L System 19 CH4 Industrial shipment setting gain value H System 20 CH1 User range setting offset value L System 21 CH1 User range setting offset value H System 22 CH1 User range setting gain value L System 23 CH1 User range setting gain value H System 24 CH2 User range setting offset value L System 25 CH2 User range setting offset value H System 26 CH2 User range setting gain value L System 27 CH2 User range setting gain value
289. ssary frequency data Thus only digital values with target frequency data can be obtained Select the low pass filter the high pass filter or the band pass filter according to a sensor connected When the high pass filter or the band pass filter is used direct signals are eliminated Direct current Riisiessenssesneeieeneenseieals After low pass filter Low frequency Mid frequency After band pass filter Waves containing direct current low frequency mid frequency and high frequency YN High frequency After high pass filter 80 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS a Characteristics and advantages of the digital filters The following table lists the characteristics and advantages of the digital filters Filter type Characteristic Advantage dB 1 1 o i Performed every sampling cycle conversion cycle o i e This filter attenuates frequency signals between a E i pass band edge frequency and the pass band edge Low pass filter low i F E frequency an attenuation band width cutting off frequency pass filter E Pass band 1 d CO Stop band 3 frequency signals higher than the attenuation band Att ti 3 i H aA The target frequency of the filtering should be the 4 4 a Passband Pass band edge FIFA same as or lower than 1 2 of Sam
290. struction 8 0 o o an an a at 1 File registers set for each local device or program cannot be used Descriptions of eating side Setting data and data woe dL Setting da User _ Device value is set by the user data Descripti 3 g YP roe System Device value is set by 9 Connection number Setting range 1 to 16 User BIN 16 bit the CPU module 2 Start number of the device from which control data are stored Device name Start number of the device which tums on for one scan upon System completion of the instruction Bit Gi i 1 also tums on when failed g BE i 35 Descriptions of 2 _Control da E control data if any Device Tem Description Setting range f Set by HF a0 System area Z B Es Completion status is stored ss eu ei 0000 Completed m System Be Other than 0000s Failed Error code aT PE f 63 Detailed descriptions of the instruction Conditions for the error and error codes For the errors not described in this manual refer to the following OAJ MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Simple program example s and descriptions of the devices used 14 instruction closes a connection specified in Disconnection of a connection The result of the SP SOCCLOSE instruction can be checked with the completion device 0 and 1 Completion device 0 Tums on in the END processing of a scan after completion of the SP
291. t OFF gt External trigger request ON e For Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 No request 0 gt Conversion request 1 The following table lists the definition of terms in the trigger conversion function ON OFF Trigger Generic term y SE ON OFF request operation conversion name OFE SON External Trigger No wees trigger request OFF gt External trigger request Convert Request ON Trigger External Input External trigger request ON gt No external trigger request conversion erminal OFF request OFF gt ON Inside trigger No request 0 gt Conversion request 1 conversion request ON gt OFF Un G161 Conversion request 1 gt No request 0 4 No external trigger request OFF OFF voltage OFF current External trigger request ON ON voltage ON current For details on the OFF voltage OFF current and ON voltage ON current of the external trigger refer to the following Performance specifications _ Page 26 Section 3 2 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 2 Restrictions of when the trigger conversion function is used The following table lists the restrictions of when the trigger conversion function is used Function name Restrictions Error code Averaging Regardless of the setting in Averaging process setting Un G24 the processing sampling processing is performed The warning output function rate alarm cannot be used When Enabled 0 is set in CHO Warning
292. t in CHO Time 31071 Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Set the moving average count to a value in the Un G1 to Un G4 is outside the range of 2 to 1000 range of 2 to 1000 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O The time lag filter constant value set in CHO Time 4 Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Set the time lag filter constant to a value within the s320 Un G1 to Un G4 is outside the range of 1 to 500 range of 1 to 500 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O The value set in CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Set the value in CHO Difference conversion trigger 3701 Un G175 is other than 0 and 1 Un G172 to Un G175 to No request 0 or Trigger The channel where the error has occurred fits in O request 1 When the user range is set or restored values are as follows a y Set values so that they meet the following condition 4001 Offset value gt Gain value f or Offset value lt Gain value The channel where the error has occurred fits in O When the offset gain setting is configured channels or Os are set oo Correct the setting in Offset gain setting mode Offset A simultaneously in both Offset gain setting mode Offset o 500 o specification Un G22 and or Offset gain setting specification Un G22 and Offset gain setting mode Gain at waa mode Gain specification Un G23 specification Un G23 The settings in
293. t output characteristic in 4 to 20mA Extended mode Input output characteristic in 1 to 5V Extended mode Digital output value Digital output value 32767 WJ 32767 WJ _____ 32000 32000 4 to 20mA Extended mode 4 to 20mA gt Extended the mode to 0 to 20mA 1 to 5V Extended mode 0 0 8000 hienn Et ae P on see Willeseccecee S768 eee aa bee Soh soe E E 769 EEES A EE E le te ere debts eee 0 4 10 20 Analog input current mA 0 1 5 Analog input voltage V I lt gt I lt gt Extended Extended Extended For details on the current input characteristic and the voltage input characteristic refer to the following e I O Conversion Characteristic of A D Conversion gt Page 279 Appendix 3 2 Setting procedure Set with the input range setting of the switch setting Point When the input range extended mode function is used with the scaling function the shift function and the difference conversion function digital output values may exceed the range of 32768 to 32767 In that case the value fixed at the upper limit value 32767 or the lower limit value 32768 is stored as a digital operation value e Processing Each Function gt Page 71 Section 8 2 94 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 6 Maximum Value Minimum Value Hold Function The A D converter module stores the maximum and minimum values of the digital operation values for each channel in the buffer memory Values a
294. t setting offset value L System 5 CH1 Industrial shipment setting offset value H System S 6 CH1 Industrial shipment setting gain value L System S 7 CH1 Industrial shipment setting gain value H System S 8 CH2 Industrial shipment setting offset value L System S 9 CH2 Industrial shipment setting offset value H System 10 CH2 Industrial shipment setting gain value L System 11 CH2 Industrial shipment setting gain value H System 12 CH3 Industrial shipment setting offset value L System S 13 CH3 Industrial shipment setting offset value H System 14 CH3 Industrial shipment setting gain value L System 8 15 CH3 Industrial shipment setting gain value H System S 16 CH4 Industrial shipment setting offset value L System S 17 CH4 Industrial shipment setting offset value H System S 18 CH4 Industrial shipment setting gain value L System 19 CH4 Industrial shipment setting gain value H System 20 CH1 User range setting offset value L System S 21 CH1 User range setting offset value H System S 22 CH1 User range setting gain value L System S 23 CH1 User range setting gain value H System S 24 CH2 User range setting offset value L System 25 CH2 User range setting offset value H System 8 26 CH2 User range setting gain value L System S 27 CH2 User range setting gain value H
295. t value 56 CH4 default value 57 rere a Trigger setting value 32768 to 32767 default value 0 Loading interrupt enable disable setting 0 Enabled 1 Disabled default value Logging load points setting value 10 to 10000 default value 1000 Page 130 Section 8 13 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 7 4 Auto Refresh This function transfers data in the buffer memory to specified devices By the auto refresh setting reading writing data by programming becomes unnecessary 1 Setting procedure Open the Auto_Refresh window 1 Start Auto_Refresh XZ Project window gt Intelligent Function Module lt gt module name gt Auto_Refresh 2 Click the item to be set and input the auto refresh target device 4t 0030 60AD4 2GH Auto_Refresh Display Filter Display All ad Item CH1 CH2 Transfer to PLC Transfers buffer memory data to the specified device A D conversion completed flag Digital output value D1 D2 Maximum value Minimum value Digital operation value Warning output flag Process alarm ate aS D18 Warning output flag Rate alarm D19 7 Input signal error detection flag D8 Latest error code D10 Latest address of error history Trigger conversion completed flag Difference conversion reference value Difference conversion status flag Logging hold flag Transfer to intelligent function module Shifting amount to conversion value Difference conversion trigger togging
296. te eads Mee Re Ge nals Ga Segre abd ates 21 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES 23 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 25 3 1 General Specifications 0 00 25 3 2 Performance Specifications 02 0 0 teen eee 26 3 2 1 Number of parameter settings 00 0 0 anaana anaana aaeeea 28 BBS BUNCHOMMLIS Tig 2ccae te tin ices sh Seth e Mancsed Peet Ae cob e ae caed hah Rl ela ec it oe Dad kae ens 29 34 WO Sigtial Listes reniri aoe eE eevee lng dt AEE na ia cdende a Bad Wee Ma SENEE 31 3 5 List of Buffer Memory Addresses 1 2 0 0 ccc unuunu 32 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 45 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 47 5 1 Overall System Configuration sssusa tnt e te neae 47 52 Applicable System adai ee a a E Hames tad EEEE ed Gh eit dtd eae Ped 48 5 3 Restrictions when the A D Converter Module Is Connected to a Head Module 48 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 49 6 1 Installation Environment and Installation Position 0 00000000 c ee eee eee 49 G2 Terminal Block Anaia A hae ee iad aad a aa Sa Rims Aahgand anan E i 50 6 3 Wingi Mather dete ee ti hihecehbeewaad ds ke abl awd Shean E eb e eile 52 64 gt External Wiring is saseda byrne sea ects ahaa ok ore aes oe eae A 53 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 56 7 1 Addition of Modules 0 0 0 ccc eee een enn n ene n eens 56 2 Switch Setting ves eval eae dda Wind eae ae lin BO Me aed EO I MPSS StS 57 3 Parameter Setting en atid gah bh a ie hee eed 58 10
297. tenuation band 9310 Un G311 and CHO Attenuation band width Un G332 to width Un G335 are set beyond the setting range The channel where the error has occurred fits in O e 330 lt Attenuation band width e Pass band edge frequency lt 12000 When the sampling cycle is 80 us e 0 lt Pass band edge frequency Attenuation band width e 170 lt Attenuation band width e Pass band edge frequency lt 6000 224 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Hae i Description and cause of error Action decimal Set the values of CH1 BPF Pass band edge frequency Low Un G316 to CH4 BPF Pass band edge frequency High Un G323 and CHO Attenuation band width Un G332 to Un G335 within the following setting range When the sampling cycle is 40 us Pass band edge frequency High Attenuation band width lt 12000 The values of CH1 BPF Pass band edge frequency Low 0 lt Pass band edge frequency Low Attenuation Un G316 to CH4 BPF Pass band edge frequency High band width 232011 Un G323 and CHO Attenuation band width Un G332 to 330 lt Attenuation band width Un G335 are set beyond the setting range e Pass band edge frequency Low lt Pass band The channel where the error has occurred fits in O edge frequency High When the sampling cycle is 80 us e Pass band edge frequency High Attenuation band width lt 6000 e 0 lt Pass band edge frequency Low Attenuation band w
298. ter power on or after resetting the CPU module 2 This shows whether whether reading the data from or writing the data to the area with programs is possible R Readable W Writable 41 2 Error history Un G1800 to Un G4999 Address Address x 5 decimal hexadecimal o Default Read Write 1800 7084 Latest address of error history 0 R 1801 7094 to to System area 1809 7114 1810 7124 Error code 0 R First two Last two 1811 7134 digits of the digits of the 0 R year year 1812 7144 Error time Month Day 0 1813 7154 No 1 Hour Minute 0 1814 716 Second payotine 0 R week 1815 7174 to to System area 1819 71By 1820 71Cy to to No 2 Same as No 1 1829 7254 1830 7264 to to No 3 Same as No 1 1839 72Fy 1840 7304 to to No 4 Same as No 1 1849 7394 1850 73Ay to to No 5 Same as No 1 1859 7434 1860 7444 to to No 6 Same as No 1 1869 74Dy 1870 74Ey to to No 7 Same as No 1 1879 7574 1880 7584 to to No 8 Same as No 1 1889 7614 1890 7624 to to No 9 Same as No 1 1899 76B 42 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Address I 7 decimal hexadecimal Name Default Read Write 1900 76Cy to to No 10 Same as No 1 1909 7754H 1910 7764 to to No 11 Same as No 1 1919 77Fy 1920 7804 to to No 12 Same as No 1 1929 7894 1930 78A to to No 13 Same as No 1 1939 7934 1940 7944 to to No 14 Sa
299. th 3 a 1 Pass band Frequency bandwidth which passes through the filter without being attenuated 2 Attenuation band Frequency bandwidth whose attenuation rate through the filter is in a transition state 33 Stop band Frequency bandwidth attenuated by the filter 4 Sampling frequency The reciprocal of the sampling cycle 1 Sampling cycle 81 b How to use the digital filters To use the digital filtering function set a digital filter Low pass filter 5 High pass filter 6 or Band pass filter 7 to Averaging process setting Un G24 set a pass band edge frequency and an attenuation band width and turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 The following table lists the setting ranges for each digital filter Digital filter Buffer memory Description of setting and setting range Low pass filter Averaging process setting Un G24 Set a relevant bit of a channel where filter processing is necessary to Low pass filter 5 CHO LPF Pass band edge frequency Un G300 to Un G303 CHO Attenuation band width Un G332 to Un G335 Set a pass band edge frequency for the low pass filter The following table shows the setting range of the frequency When a frequency out of the setting range is set an error occurs Error code 2300 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on Sampling cycle Setting range e Pass band ed
300. the mode to the offset gain setting mode by the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN Switching the channels for which the offset gain setting is configured e Writing the offset gain value to the A D converter module Switching the mode back to the normal mode Switches to the offset gain setting mode M7 Stores the setting data of the tt MOV K1 D1 dedicated instruction G OFFGAN in D1 G OFFGAN U3 D1 Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN Offset gain range specification uni polar current MO B z LMOV HOE D2 J Stores the uni polar current in D2 Offset gain range specification bi polar voltage i M1 m a LMOV HOF D2 J Stores the bi polar voltage in D2 Channel selection i me MOV H1 DO Stores the target channel number in DO 1 Sets a channel to the offset setting i M3 M4 X3A g U3 E H 1h MOV D2 G46 Offset gain range specification i U3 g LMOV DO G22 J Specifies the offset target channel U3 ng i MOV KO G23 J soared for the gain target Sets a channel to the gain setting M4 M3 X3A E U3 R i Wt MOV D2 G46 Offset gain range specification U3 a A OA A D0 G23 J Specifies the gain target channel NN i an U3 ace N mov Ko Coo oie for the offset target pi Q i l Z2 Switches the channel to offset gain setting ee M5 X3B z Turns on Channel change request y SeT Y3B yap ae aa 39 X3B r Turns
301. the same system lex When the offset gain setting in module No 1 is applied to modules No 2 to No 4 1 Save the offset gain values of module No 1 2 Apply the offset gain values to modules No 2 to No 4 2 Methods for saving and restoring offset gain values There are two methods for saving and restoring offset gain values e Saving and restoring by dedicated instructions Saving and restoring by reading from and writing to the buffer memory a Saving and restoring by dedicated instructions Use the dedicated instruction G P OGLOAD to temporarily save the offset gain values of the source A D converter module to the internal device of the CPU then use G P OGSTOR to write the values to the destination A D converter module Prevent the saved offset gain value data from being deleted by one of the following methods before replacing the modules e Use latch settings for the internal device of the destination module Save the data onto an SD memory card To write data use the SP FWRITE instruction To read data use the SP FREAD instruction Store the saved data For use of dedicated instructions refer to the following e Dedicated Instruction gt Page 285 Appendix 5 sane uleBAesyoO Buuojsey pue Bunes 91 g b Saving and restoring by reading from and writing to the buffer memory Use Pass data classification setting Un G200 CH1 Industrial shipment setting offset value L Un G202
302. ting Un G27 Digital clipping enable disable setting Un G29 Warning output setting Un G48 Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 CHO Scaling lower limit value Un G62 Un G64 Un G66 Un G68 CHO Scaling upper limit value Un G63 Un G65 Un G67 Un G69 CHO Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 Un G90 Un G94 Un G98 CHO Process alarm lower upper limit value Un G87 Un G91 Un G95 Un G99 CHO Process alarm upper lower limit value Un G88 Un G92 Un G96 Un G100 CHO Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G89 Un G93 Un G97 Un G101 CHO Rate alarm detection cycle setting value Un G118 to Un G121 CHO Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 Un G128 Un G130 Un G132 CHO Rate alarm lower limit value Un G127 Un G129 Un G131 Un G133 CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G145 CHO LPF Pass band edge frequency Un G300 to Un G303 CHO HPF Pass band edge frequency Un G308 to Un G311 CHO BPF Pass band edge frequency Low Un G316 Un G318 Un G320 Un G322 CHO BPF Pass band edge frequency High Un G317 Un G319 Un G321 Un G323 CHO Attenuation band width Un G332 to Un G335 CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1027 CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 CHO Hold trigger condition setting Un G1
303. ting Sets method of A D c A D conversion Sern enable disable setting Gene hd Averaging process setting O Enable Time Average Count 2 Set Rate alarm output setting to 0 Enable Rate alarm output setting l 0 Enable x Rate alarm detection cycle setting value 1 Disable 3 Seta value to Rate alarm detection cycle setting value Rate alarm output setting O Enable Rate alarm detection cycle setting Valle 50 Times Item Setting value Rate alarm detection cycle setting value 1 to 32000 Times Point An error occurs when a value out of the above setting range is set Error code 710 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on 4 Set values to Rate alarm upper limit value and Rate alarm lower limit value Rate alarm apper limit value 1600 0 Rate alarm lower limit value Item Setting value Rate alarm upper limit value 3276 8 to 3276 7 Rate alarm lower limit value Point Ser the rate alarm upper limit value and the rate alarm lower limit value in a unit of 0 1 of the digital output value corresponding to the rate alarm upper limit value The rate alarm setting must meet the following condition Rate alarm upper limit value gt Rate alarm lower limit value An error occurs when a value out of the above setting range is set Error code 700 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag X
304. ting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Enabled 0 All channels 2 CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag filter constant Un G1 to Un G4 Configure the time count moving average and time lag filter constant for each channel to which the averaging processing is specified The following table lists the setting range Processing method Setting value Time average 2 to 5000 ms Count average 4 to 65000 times Moving average 2 to 1000 times Time lag filter 1 to 500 Times a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is 0 All channels Point A channel where a value out of the above setting range is set brings about an error The error code 300 310 or 320 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on The A D conversion is performed with the setting before the error Set the time lag filter constant for Time lag filter The value of the time constant unit ms is the product of the time lag filter constant and the sampling cycle When a value out of the range is set an error occurs The error code 320 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on The A D conversion is performed with the setting before the error The default value is 0 Cha
305. tion for the A D conversion is completed after the power on or after the reset operation of the CPU module and the A D conversion is performed In the following cases Module READY X0 turns off In the offset gain setting mode In this case the A D conversion is performed e When a watchdog timer error occurs in the A D converter module In this case the A D conversion is not performed 2 Warning output signal X8 Warning output signal X8 turns on when the process alarm or rate alarm has been detected a Process alarm e Warning output signal X8 turns on when digital operation values of the A D conversion enabled channels exceed the ranges set for CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G101 after the process alarm is validated The ALM LED also turns on along with the on of the signal e Warning output signal X8 turns off when the digital operation values fall within the setting range for all the A D conversion enabled channels The ALM LED also turns off along with the off of the signal 232 APPENDICES b Rate alarm e Warning output signal X8 turns on when the change rate of digital output values of the A D conversion enabled channels at every rate alarm warning detection period exceed the ranges set for CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 to CH4 Rate alarm lower limit value Un G133 after the rate alarm is validated The ALM LED also turns on along
306. tion on operating the display unit or for details on the functions and menu configuration refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 9 1 Display Unit The display unit is an LCD attachable to the CPU module By attaching it to the CPU module the status of the system can be checked and the system settings can be changed without the software package In addition if a problem occurs the cause of the problem can be identified by displaying the error information For details on how to check and clear an error from the display unit refer to the following e Checking and Clearing Errors lt _ gt Page 195 Section 9 4 yun Aedsiq 1 6 181 9 2 182 1 Organization The following diagram shows how the MOD MON TEST and MOD SETTINGS menus are organized CPU MON TEST CPU SETTINGS MOD MON TEST MOD SETTINGS USER MESSAGE OPTIONS L L Menu Transition SPECIFY I O No MODULE LIST SPECIFY I O No MODULE LIST INIT CHANGE r BUF MEM MON TES CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 A D CONVERSION AVE PROCESSING TIME COUNT MOV LPF PASS BAND HPF PASS BAND BPF PASS BAND L BPF PASS BAND H ATTENUATE BAND PROCESS ALARM PRALARM UPR UPR PRALARM UPR LWR PRALARM LWR UPR PRALARM LWR LWR RATE ALARM RATE ALARM TIME RATE ALARM UPR RATE ALARM LWR INPUT SIG
307. to 10V 5H H 4 to 20mA Extended A CH4 CH3CH2 CH1 mode H 1 to 5V Extended mode Bu User range setting E Uni polar current F User range setting F Bi polar voltage H Switch 2 0 Fixed blank Switch 3 0 Fixed blank H Da ay l ga t_ OH Fixed AID Conversion Timing OH Normal Switch 4 1H External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal 2H to FH value other than OH and 1H Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory OH Fixed Drive Mode Setting OH Normal A D Converter Processing Mode 1H to FH value other than OH Offset Gain Setting Mode Switch 5 0 Fixed blank 298 4 2 3 APPENDICES The operation is the same when any value within the setting range is set If the operation mode is set to Normal A D converter processing mode 0 4 Normal 0 4 External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal 14 or Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory 24 to Fy can be set as the A D conversion timing If the operation mode is set to Offset Gain Setting Mode 14 to Fp the setting for the A D conversion timing is ignored and the operation mode is set to Normal Op in the internal operation If the operation mode is set to Normal A D converter processing mode 0 and a value other than Normal Op is set as the A D conversion timing the mode transitions to the trigger conversion mode when the system is powered off then on or the CPU module is reset The trig
308. to 12000Hz default value OHz Low pass filter edge frequency 80us 0 to 6000HZ default value OHz N HPF Pass band 40us 0 to 12000Hz default value OHz ae High pass filter Digital filter edge frequency 80us 0 to 6000Hz default value OHz Page 74 setting BPF Pass band Section 8 4 40us 0 to 12000Hz default value OHZ edge frequency 80us 0 to 6000Hz default value OHz High Band pass filter BPF Pass band 40us 0 to 12000Hz default value OHZ edge frequency 80us 0 to 6000Hz default value OHz Low 0 Enable Warning output setting f 1 Disable default value Process alarm upper upper limit 32768 to 32767 default value 0 value IEE Page 102 Process alarm upper lower limit 32768 to 32767 default value 0 Section value 8 8 1 Process alarm lower upper limit 32768 to 32767 default value 0 Warning output value function Process alarm lower lower limit 32768 to 32767 default value 0 value 0 Enable Rate alarm output setting i 1 Disable default value Rate alarm detection cycle setting Page 105 l g 1 to 32000 Times default value 1 Times Section valu 8 8 2 Rate alarm upper limit value 3276 8 to 3276 7 default value 0 0 Rate alarm lower limit value 3276 8 to 3276 7 default value 0 0 0 Disable default value 1 Upper and Lower Detection Input signal error detection setting 2 Lower Detection Input signal error Page 96 3 Upper Detection 4 detection 4 Disconn
309. to the following e Trigger Conversion Function gt Page 162 Section 8 14 Setting for A D conversion timing Setting value Normal 0 External Trigger Convert Request External Input Terminal 1 Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory 2 28 Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 The conversion request of when Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory is set as the A D conversion timing set in Drive Mode Setting is performed For details on the trigger conversion function refer to the following e Trigger Conversion Function K gt Page 162 Section 8 14 Inside trigger conversion request Setting value No request 0 Conversion request 1 a Default value The default value is No request 0 Point When a value out of the above range is set an error occurs Error code 2201 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on A D conversion is not performed To perform A D conversion again using Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 change the setting in Inside trigger conversion request Un G161 from Conversion request 1 to No request 0 APPENDICES 29 Trigger conversion completed flag Un G162 Trigger conversion status can be checked with this flag For details on the trigger conversion function refer to the following e Trigger Conversion Function gt Page 162 Section 8 14
310. tool recommended by their manufacturer Sleeved solderless terminals cannot be used Solderless terminal Wire Tightening P Temperature Model Diameter Type Material 1 torque rating R1 25 3 0 42 to 0 58N m 22 to 18 AWG Stranded Copper 75 C or more 2 Signal names of the terminal block The following table shows signal names of the terminal block Pin number Signal name 1 V L 2 CH1 V l L60AD4 2GH RUN ALM 3 ERR 4 V CH1 CH4 10 10V 0 20mA 5 CH2 V l CH1 6 I cut Vt 7 FG Wi cH 4 cH2 8 SLD is V cHe 9 V eL A ca Mt 10 CH3 V l SARA T No e SLD ii aof egm on 12 ve V OD gt crs 13 CH4 V Il 5 JED Wi cH3 CED cua 14 I CED phe T n 15 FG os 16 SLD i Fi 2 17 TRG SLD 17 i TRG 18 GND GND 4 The TRG terminal an external input terminal is used for both the logging outside trigger of the logging function and the external trigger conversion request external input terminal of the trigger conversion function 50 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 3 Removal and installation of the terminal block The following procedures show how to remove and install the terminal block a Removal procedure 1 Open the terminal cover and loosen the terminal block mounting screw Terminal block mounting screw 2 Use the termi
311. ttenuation band width Un G332 to Un G335 Set an attenuation band width for each channel Set an attenuation band width The difference between an HPF pass band edge frequency and the attenuation band width becomes the boundary between the attenuation band and a stop band The frequency lower than the difference between the HPF pass band edge frequency and attenuation band width is attenuated 82 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Digital filter Buffer memory Description of setting and setting range Band pass filter Averaging process setting Un G24 Set a relevant bit of a channel where filter processing is necessary to Band pass filter 7 CHO BPF Pass band edge frequency Low Un G316 Un G318 Un G320 Un G322 CHO BPF Pass band edge frequency High Un G317 Un G319 Un G321 Un G323 Set a pass band edge frequency for the band pass filter The following table shows the setting range of the frequency When frequency out of the setting range is set an error occurs Error code 2320 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on then the ERR LED turns on Sampling cycle Setting range e Pass band edge frequency High Attenuation band width lt 12000 e 0 lt Pass band edge frequency Low 40us Attenuation band width 330 lt attenuation band width e Pass band edge frequency Low lt Pass band edge frequency High e Pass band edge frequency High
312. ue obtained after digital clipping For details refer to the following e Processing Each Function lt Page 71 Section 8 2 uoyoun4 Buiddi9 ebia LL s 125 8 1 2 Difference Conversion Function 126 The digital operation value at the start of this function is treated as 0 reference value Thereafter values that increase or decrease from the reference value are stored in the buffer memory Digital operation value 32000 CHO Digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 16000 12000 8000 4000 0 Time 4000 CHO Difference conversion trigger No request 0 Trigger request 1 No request 0 Un G172 to Un G175 CHO Digital operation value X Xas0 20001600X 1600X X 1200012000 CHO Difference conversion reference value 0 12000 Un G180 to Un G183 UNGBSCUNGST X Xa o X4000X ao00X X 12000X12000X CHO Difference conversion status flag Not converted 0 Converting difference 1 Not converted 0 Un G190 to Un G193 1 Operation of the difference conversion function The digital operation value at the difference conversion start the data stored inside the A D converter module before difference conversion starts is determined as a difference conversion reference value The value acquired by subtracting the difference conversion reference value from the digital operation value is stored in CHO Digital operation valu
313. ues for Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and turn on then off Operating condition setting 3 request Y9 e Un G158 09644 e Un G159 41444 Perform G P OFFGAN Argument S 1 offset gain setting mode Set the following values for Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and turn on then off Operating condition setting 4 request Y9 Un G158 41444 e Un G159 09644 Set Drive Mode Setting to Normal A D Converter Processing Mode and A D Conversion Timing to External Trigger 5 Convert Request External Input Terminal or Internal Trigger Conversion Request Buffer Memory in Switch Setting of GX Works2 70 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 2 Processing Each Function The functions are processed in the order shown below If multiple functions are enabled the output of the first processed function is used as the input of the next function Analog input CH1 to CH4 Trigger conversion function Input signal error detection function Averaging processing i Digital clipping function a g Scaling function Difference conversion function Rate alarm Warning output Process alarm function Logging function i PIN y y CHO Digital output value CHO Digital operation value Un G11 to Un G14 Un G54 to Un G57 uonouny yoeg Buisse001g 7g y CHO Maximum value CHO Minimum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G31 Un G33 Un G3
314. uffer memory data to the specified device 7 Write the set parameter to the head module and reset the head module or power off then on the programmable controllers D Online gt Write to PLC or Power OFF ON JNpPON peH e 0 pe oauUOy s Npow JalWeAUOD q Y Ue u ayM TOL 215 7 Program example The following shows a program example The program can be written to the CPU module of the master station SB49 SWOBO C r MC NO M100 NO_ M100 Reads the digital output value X20 X1000 X100E Y10099 ran MOV w1000 KIMO Reads A D conversion completed flag MO E x MOV Ww1001 D11 Reads CH1 Digital output value M1 MOV Ww1002 D12 Reads CH2 Digital output value M2 k lov wiog D13 Reads CH3 Digital operation value M3 3 a 1 MOV W1004 D14 Reads CH4 Digital output value Process alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence X1000 gt Reads Warning output flag MOV W1018 K2M20 Process alarm M22 Processing when a warning occurs CH2 Processing at the warning occurrence process alarm upper limit value M23 A CH2 Processing at the warning occurrence Processing when a warning occurs awe process alarm lower limit value Rate alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence X1000 i MOV W1019 K2M30 Reads Warning output flag Rate alarm M36 z 7 CH4 Processing at the warning occu
315. ule every time 1000 points of data are logged v L60AD4 2GH a Logging is a completed 1 to 1000th data 1 Logging 1001 to 2000th data 2001 to 3000th data 3001 to 4000th data 4001 to 5000th data L a Waiting for 5001 to 6000th data a logging 6001 to 7000th data 7001 to 8000th data 8001 to 9000th data 9001 to 10000th data Device memory of the CPU module 1 to 1000th data Transfer Transferring logging data by using an interrupt program 137 uonouny Bui6607 48 uolouny uol e ap peo Bulb6o7 1 e198 2 Setting of interrupt pointers Assign the interrupt causes SI of the A D converter module and interrupt pointers of the CPU module with the intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting of the programming tool Set a start number of the interrupt pointers used for Interrupt Pointer Start No Set Interrupt Pointer Count to a maximum number of the channels where this function is enabled The following table lists the interrupt causes of the logging load pointer detection SI No Interrupt cause 0 CH1 Logging load pointer detection 1 CH2 Logging load pointer detection 2 CH3 Logging load pointer detection 3 CH4 Logging load pointer detection Point Interrupt causes used must be assigned to the interrupt pointers of the CPU module If the causes are not assigned
316. ule L60AD4 2GH and configure the setting as follows Project window lt gt Intelligent Function Module 2 gt L60AD4 2GH gt Parameter 0000 1 60AD4 2GH Parameter Display All 0 Enable 4 Primary Delay Filter 100 Times 0 Enable 0 Enable O Enable 0 Sampling Processing 2 Count Average 3 Moving Average 50 Times 10 Times 214 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 6 Display the Auto Refresh setting window for the A D converter module L60AD4 2GH and configure the setting as follows Project window Intelligent Function Module gt L60AD4 2GH gt Auto_Refresh 4 0000 L60AD4 2GH Auto_Refresh EEEa Display Filter Display all x Item CH1 CH2 E Fransfer to PLE Transfers buffer memory data to the specified device AJD conversion completed flag Digital output value w1002 Maximum value Minimum value Digital operation value Warning output flag Process alarm Warning output flag Rate alarm w1019 Input signal error detection flag w1008 Latest error code w1010 Latest address of error history Trigger conversion completed Flag Difference conversion reference value Difference conversion status flag Logging hold flag Transfer to intelligent function module Shifting amount to conversion value Difference conversion trigger Logging hold request level data N w1018 E Transfer data of the specified device to buffer memory Transfers b
317. um value reset request YD to clear the maximum and minimum values stored in CHO Maximum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 Un G36 and CHO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 Un G35 Un G37 For the timing of turning the signal on then off refer to the following e Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD _ gt Page 237 Appendix 1 1 7 Error clear request YF To clear Error flag XF Input signal error detection signal XC and Latest error code Un G19 turn on then off Error clear request YF For the timing of turning the signal on then off refer to the following e Input signal error detection signal XC L gt Page 236 Appendix 1 1 6 e Error flag XF L gt Page 237 Appendix 1 1 9 239 leuis nding Z xipueddy sjeuBls O I JO sjlejeq xipueddy Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses The following describes the details of buffer memory addresses of the A D converter module 1 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO Set whether the A D conversion is enabled or disabled for each channel For details on the A D conversion enable disable function refer to the following e A D Conversion Enable disable Function gt Page 73 Section 8 3 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO o Jo fo Jo fo foto jfofofo o Jo fenonsjonzajen a ia Data for b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Enabled 1 Disabled a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition set
318. unction and difference conversion function can represent the digital output value in an easily understandable value according to the use environment 5 Comparing monitoring target devices By using the input signal error detection function input range extended mode function or warning output function process alarm rate alarm the status of connected devices can be monitored easily 6 Time lag filter function With a time lag filter constant a digital output value with smoothed noise is output Man hours for programming can be reduced 21 22 7 A D conversion is possible at any timing The conversion of analog values into digital values according to the input of Trigger conversion request is possible The effectiveness of use operation and programming are improved Analog input signal Displacement sensor gt Trigger conversion request by the external input terminal 8 Easy setting with GX Works2 Programming is reduced because the initial settings or auto refresh settings can be configured on the window In addition setting status and operation status of modules can be checked easily CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES The following table shows part names of the A D converter module Eo ras Vr S WA AS
319. unt average value to the buffer memory varies depending on the sampling cycle Processing time Set number of times x Sampling cycle Ex The processing count for the following settings is calculated below Item Setting Number of channels used the number of channels set to 4 channels CH1 to CH4 A D conversion enabled Set number of times 20 times 20 x 0 08 1 6 ms gt An average value is output every 1 6 ms Point Because the count average requires a sum of at least two counts not counting the maximum and minimum values the set number of times should be four or more 17 poya UOISIeAUOD C V 8 78 c Moving average The A D converter module averages digital output values of set number of times which are measured every sampling cycle and stores them in the buffer memory Since the averaging processing is performed on a moving set of sampling processing the latest digital output values can be obtained The following figure shows the moving average processing of when the set number of times is four Digital output value Sampling cycle 32000 24 J 16000 4 1st storage a 2nd storage b gt 3rd storage c PEPEE SEENA PAC DEEE awe Fooseos 0 Time ms CH1 Digital output i Vaan isnt Vania a y eae value Un G11 0 Vicia ee ee ee ee ee A D conversion eN completed flag XE 1 gt Data
320. upt Processing time of the program in the CPU module and the scan time of the interrupt program interrupt program 1 MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 2 144 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 Example of use of the logging load detection function The following describes the program example of use of the logging load detection function a A program example which detects a logging load pointer detection interrupt being not captured e This program stores a this logging load pointer to Device A as a last logging load pointer e When a last logging load pointer is not equal to the value in Device A at the start of the next interrupt program the logging load pointer detection interrupt is judged that it is not captured Ex When the logging data are stored every 1000 points to the data registers of the CPU module under the following conditions e CPU module L26CPU BT CH1 Logging load points setting value Un G1208 1000 e Interrupt Pointer Start No 60 e Interrupt Pointer Count 1 U3 Stores the points of logging data that is set H _ BMOV G5000Z0ZR0ZZ4 D10 J in Logging load points monitor value in the save destination file register Adds the points of Logging load points monitor D D1 D2 value to the write position of the save 0 7 destination file register And stores the obtained g value as the
321. upt Pointer Count 1 SM402 Initializes Logging load points monitor LMOV KO D10 value Sets the maximum number of stored points 4 for the save destination file register 1 i Initializes the write position of a save i i E i LDMOV K50000 D30 i 1 i 1 i r LOMOV KO D20 4 destination file register 1 f EI FEND Interrupt processing 4 mo p gt pa poo y uov mae zo stores the logging data of This logging load CE 010 Jmonfervelieln sregeere Pons DMOV oo 2e Yestination fle register in the index register U3 Stores the points of logging data that is set BMOV G5000Z0ZR0ZZ4 D10 in Logging load points monitor value in the save destination file register 2 2 Adds the points of Logging load points monitor ww p value to the write position of the save destination LD big D20 file register And stores the obtained value as the 5 write position for the next logging oQ I a S E a a gee al ee ee ae ee a 7 Q 3 IRET e Eee oe A Oo 5 END D 2 25 2 ae o Device Description a Cc D10 Logging load points monitor value a F Pe nT P D20 The write position of the save destination file register 5 D30 Maximum number of stored points of the save destination file register ZO Index register for logging load position Z4 Index register for the save destination file register ZRO Save destination file register
322. value 0 Enable Scaling enable disable JoEnable awd Scaling lower limit value Set values for Scaling upper limit value and Scaling lower limit value Scaling enable disable setting O Enable Scaling upper limit value 12000 Scaling lower limit value eats Set a value to Shifting amount to conversion value Shifting amount to conversion value CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS The following figure and table show the values stored in CH1 Digital output value Un G11 and CH1 Digital operation value Un G54 1 CH1 Digital output value Un G11 32000 Scaling Upper limit value 32000 12000 Lower limit value 02000 14000 12000 2 Value after scaling Shift addition Adds 2000 to the value after scaling Vv 3 CH1 Digital operation value Un G54 Analog input voltage V Analog input CH1 Digital output value CH1 Digital operation Value after scaling voltage V Un G11 value Un G54 0 0 2000 4000 1 6400 4000 6000 2 12800 6000 8000 3 19200 8000 10000 4 25600 10000 12000 5 32000 12000 14000 Point When the shift function is used with the digital clipping function and scaling function shift addition is executed on the value obtained after digital clipping and scale conversion Therefore the range of the digital operation value is determined as 32768 to 32767 For a setting example of when the digital clipping fu
323. value other than Disconnection detection 4 The values set in CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH4 ee nay Set a value within the range of 32000 to 32000 in P Scaling upper limit value Un G69 are outside the range of seat goo CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH4 32000 to 32000 ee AES Scaling upper limit value Un G69 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O The values set in CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH4 Set the values in CH1 Scaling lower limit value 4 Scaling upper limit value Un G69 are as follows Un G62 to CH4 Scaling upper limit value Un G69 A Scaling upper limit value lt Scaling lower limit value so that they meet the following condition The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Scaling upper limit value gt Scaling lower limit value CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is F Set Enable 0 or Disable 1 in CHO Logging 2000 1 set to a value other than 0 and 1 f Sank enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Set a value within the setting range in one or both of CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to A value outside the setting range is set in one or both of CHO Un G1035 or and CHO Logging cycle unit setting 2010 Logging cycle setting value UniG1032 to Un G1035 or and Un G1040 to Un G1043 CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 For the setti
324. verter Page 173 Module error collection function module and stores them to the CPU module Section 8 16 A This function clears the error from the system monitor when an error Page 174 Error clear function f occurs Section 8 17 h i The offset gain value of the user range setting uni polar current and Page 175 Saving and restoring offset gain values i s user range setting bi polar voltage can be saved or restored Section 8 18 30 3 4 I O Signal List The following table lists the I O signals of the A D converter module For details on the I O signals refer to the following e Details of I O Signals gt Page 232 Appendix 1 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Input signal Output signal Device number Signal name Device number Signal name X0 Module READY Yo x1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X4 Use prohibited Y4 Use prohibited X5 Y5 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 X8 Warning output signal Y8 X9 Operating condition setting completed flag Y9 Operating condition setting request XA Offset gain setting mode flag YA User range write request XB Channel change completed flag YB Channel change request XC Input signal error detection signal YC Use prohibited XD Maximum value YD Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag minimum value reset request XE A D conversion completed flag YE Use prohibited XF Error flag YF Error clear request Point The I
325. voltage is 32000 0 to 20mA OmA 20mA 4 to 20mA 4mA 20mA Current 4 to 20mA Extended mode AmA 20mA User range setting The analog input value set as The analog input value set as The analog input value set as Uni polar current an offset value by users an offset value by users a gain value by users 99 uonouny uonoa 2q 10113 euBis ndu 7 8 7 Setting example of input signal error detection Ex To detect an error when the analog input value becomes lower than 2 4mA at a channel with the input range of 4mA to 20mA Assign the following values to the calculation formula of the input signal error detection lower limit value Input signal error detection lower limit value 2 4mA e The lower limit value of the input range offset value 4 0mA e Gain value 20 0mA 4 0 2 4 Input signal error detection _ _ x 1000 20 0 4 0 setting value 100 10 0 Thus set the input signal error detection setting value to 100 10 0 The following figure shows the graph of the input signal error detection value in the above case Since the setting value is 100 10 0 the error is detected not only at 2 4mA but also at 21 6mA i j Error Input signal error detection l upper limit value detection y F 21 6mA 1 6mA 10 0 of 16mA 16mA Gain value Offset value Input range 1 6mA Offset value 10 0 of 16mA 2 4mA
326. y lower than the difference between the HPF pass band edge frequency and attenuation band width is attenuated Attenuation band width e Band pass filter CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable XX Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Parameter ae B Item E Basic setting A D conversion enable disable setting Averaging process setting Time Average Count CH1 i Sets method of A D ci O Enable bd 0 Enable 1 Disable 2 Set Averaging process setting to 7 Band Pass Filter Averaging process setting Time Average Count Average Moving Average Time lag Filter constant Digital filte setting 7 Band Pass Filter 0 0 Sampling Processing 1 Time Average 2 Count Average 3 Moving Average 4 Primary Delay Filter S Low Pass Filter 6 High Pass Filter 7 Band Pass Filter 3 Set BPF Pass band edge frequency Low and BPF Pass band edge frequency High to pass band edge frequencies Band pass filter BPF Pass band edge Frequency High BPF Pass band edge Frequency Low Set an attenuation band width Set value for the Banc 500 Hz 400 Hz The difference between the BPF pass band edge frequency Low and attenuation band width is the boundary between the lower attenuation band and a stop band The frequency lower than the difference between the BPF pass band edge frequency Low and

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"